Home

PDF compression, OCR, web-optimization with

1. Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No Al 11585 C03 I C Dual M onostable ICCM A4538B 2 4 11585 C03 Capacitor 0 01 F 50V 20 CPCE103P3N J1 11585 C03 Connector 4 pin 0 10 COM R1104 Q1 3 11585 C03 M OSFET N Channel TRM N2N 7000 R2 R3 11585 C03 Resistor 27K 1 4W 5 RECC273B22 R1 R8 R9 11585 C03 Resistor 47K 1 4W 5 RECC473B22 R5 R10 11585 C03 Resistor 5 15 1 2W 10 RECC511N23 R11 11585 03 Resistor 249KS 1 4W 1 RECE251B12 R4 11585 C03 Potentiometer 5005 3299W vert top adj PTCE501B33 SK1 11585 C03 Speaker 11 16 dp 85 ADSP3 11585 C03 IC Socket 16 Pin Dip SOIC116 Cl 11585 C03 Capacitor 10 F 35V 10 CPTA100M 3L 140 11585 C03 Retainer Speaker ZP10534009 010 11585 C03 PC Board Clicker Board ZP11585002 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 5 Options Voice Annunciator axe ia Te ce nen vnm 5 mon 5 Cicer Boc mus fw cep dot me thom Figure 19 2 11534 307 Hand probe assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Voice Annunciator opt 2A Voice Annunciator Installation and Use of Sound Card Voice Annunciator on page 19 7 explains the changes 16 bit Sound Card between the voice annunciator PCM 2 OPT 2 and PCM 2 OPT2A PCM 2 OPT 2A This version of PCM 2 OPT 2A uses an 16 bit sound card in place of the voice annunciator board YP11513000 The sound card is wired to the speaker v
2. items Description Drawing No Figure No Access control base assembly 11534 477 22 51 Access control ceiling assembly 11534 478 22 52 Access control gates assembly 11534 479 22 53 Access control overall assembly 11534 480 22 54 22 55 and 22 56 Access control overall wiring 11534 476 22 57 Ceiling assembly 11534 315 22 21 and 22 22 Clicker Board component layout 11532 002 22 36 Clicker Board II components 11532 004 22 42 Clicker PCB component assembly 11532 003 22 41 Clock display 11534 150 22 11 Clock display PCB component assembly 11534 151 22 12 Computer Identics swipe card reader assembly 11534 706 22 62 Detectors installation assembly 11534 321 22 74 and 22 75 Flat panel display assembly 11534 737 22 83 Front panel board components 11526 009 22 5 Front panel board SP24 basic component 11526 003 22 4 assembly Gas bottle enclosure assembly 11534 236 22 37 Gas bottle enclosure outline 11534 564 22 86 Gas control assembly 11534 502 22 30 Gas exhaust plumbing harness 11534 371 22 29 Gas manager assembly 11534 348 22 67 and 22 68 Gas manager board 11582 001 22 65 Gas manager board component 11582 003 22 66 Gas supply plumbing harness 11534 369 22 28 Hand probe assembly 11534 307 22 40 Hard disk drive assembly 11534 563 22 20 PCM 2 Technical M anual 22 1 Draw ings Overview Description Drawing No Fi
3. 5 eur seu Addins 17957 sad 7 rod S 422 wD J u d2 001 001 dH iag w 9 you 35 2 l 24 YAMS 29071 063 lt wou Pag ow spuds SLT W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy TZ 30 c Aiqwasse Jabeue W seo gpe pESTI 89 72 eunbi4 Auo 20 uesq e Du puo wsoy sung me 01029 ee d i a H H i x P i IHE M 1 IE E ES dh E pufi ag 5 b E lag MA iss i 4 Hf lil ih 4l kal tese 12 to Electronica Enckeura f e UN 7 22 76 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 22 69 11534 318 Lower electronics enclosure assembly Thermo Electron Corporation W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Z Alquiasse Joop apis pue Jeay Oce pesTT 00 22 einig yuan x 1594 Teod g yoa pun 17 42301 au aoe vee todo og LEYICH mai ames 42 16 Z00r G BAI jO uod _ BLZ enue W 6214291 Z Wd 100 938 Z gt BOS0SMGSOS Punay tomi je21 epubg BPI esl Z ou ane ua FEES 132 ER pu
4. a Chi squared Degrees of Freedom 1 6 11 16 21 26 Degrees of Freedom Figure A 5 Chi squared distribution T able A 3 is entered at the row that corresponds to the number of degrees of freedom n 1 Associated with the closest 2 found in that row isa probability listed at the top of the column T hat value is probability that P2 would be less than or equal to the number found in the table Very large or very small probabilities indicate poor fit W hen considered in terms of observed results divided by expected results intuitively an ideal experiment would produce a ratio of 1 A 5096 probability is equivalent to saying that in a random sampling P2 is just as likely to be above as bd ow the number indicated and therefore indicative of a good fit of real data to ideal Note T he fact that the degrees of freedom is one less than the number of data points can cause some consternation to students of statistics T o clarify the relationship between n and lt take the case of n 2 the smallest value of n from which an average can be computed K nowing the average and the value of only one of the two data points it is possible to derive the second data point Also thetwo data points are equidistant from their average In like fashion if the average of n data points is known then the value of any one of those data points can be derived from
5. jas yexotag Bujuojes Jadon gs jubg 19403 Jono B au see OLOOLXDS pa z 90014855 ai exp puo 346 45 1646440 9659 114 sajou 7 jams 205 9 2 enue W 6214291 Z Wd WH 941135 aet moy 65 9106 ye y GO BID ORME UcdgEOd pup HOS PUT ei 2 Qux 0900 purasip num spuaazs cup qam shun 0 FOURS di wu 195 1 DD rep edt tax uw EDU KD D is olay H Md 1 xa 1 a Lal Wd ap Tovey 2 42091 ioo dpt Stadio 308 cgo gt 1 H 11 299 99 920 294 c opip ZOOPNLISHI 402104105 uo1pe 3 ouJeu L BULIM 103407 55922 9LY YEGTT LS ZZ NBI WR 2000 50 911 Jad HAO pugno I I 1 i Wray un 0610555 yes GLOSTH fon 96291955 iun BeOS H0 apg DNAS Ostau zm a z eys ves wa uel Pung 2O 2 9 PS h
6. 92501 ad aui jd Kumsor p bau y 0355 55 0 Guppy Done 25655 1142 10948 OBB 38 25 HN I F 15 5 Hu HIT ib f j j nie Pg sns pu S iul s i Her in Bad EF hi 7 gii ps Hp 8 li E ik TE ii imn if f j ff yup s i Hu iE i ff iH jgn i Sr i ihe ig 3 arzt bi 3 all ic E T 55 4 1 HI E i jt ip rA HA in bai A i tid ap in tj B zi uie iP a 1 ib ats 25 as 1 1 b 27 8j LE motus aw ZFlIS24437 ref SCHH2510 4 req d xo mu m Bt j RARBG 5 Wn BH Lc RS RE 28 8 b r 8 1 t d BON i a i BE 3 d Q 22 61 PCM 2 Technical M anual SCHHI10 4 raqa ZP11534424 ref 1 Detal scala Figure 22 55 11534 480 Access control overall assembly 2 of 3 Entry Gale Cordicsratian shown Thermo Electron Corporation 79 2 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL Jo AIGWASSE 10402 55955 0gp peGTT 96 27 14 Ajquusssy buie 10320 Bunnog 209 yea bugie LEZENN Enid 2 sas
7. for modem connections Thermo Electron Corporation Anti Coincidence Radon Compensation Radon Ratio Status Logging Voice Delay Store Transactions Print Transactions Thermo Electron Corporation Printer Init Edit Instrument Configuration Parameters W hen anti coincidence is enabled default mode particles are classified as beta or alpha on the basis of signal amplitude D isabling this feature causes the beta counter channels to return a total particle count including alphas U sers who wish only to measure total radiation may do so by disabling anti coincidence and turning off all alpha count channels through the O verride Parameter screen T his software algorithm attempts to recognize and compensate for alarm patternstypically caused by attached radon daughters Radon compensation is always disabled when combination alpha beta emitting isotopes are expected Radon Compensation above must be enabled for this parameter to be recognized T he parameter for Radio Ratio is 1 1 0 1 6 0 alpha beta Enables and disables the storage of instrument status changes on disk If enabled the latest 200 status changes are stored Status changes include H igh Background O ut of Gas Comm Failure H V Failure Channel Sensitivity Failure H i Lo Count Failure and N ormal If the voice annunciator option is installed the PCM 2 will delay for the specified number of seconds before prompting the user audi
8. 2 Ss d is P pa iu ms i bpunt EUDEN duniit N 4 sse note 4 and detali D Wiring Sha 20549 22 87 PCM 2 Technical M anual View Figure 22 80 11534 548 Head amp shoulders switch assembly 2 of 2 Thermo Electron Corporation 88 CC W je91u429 Z WOd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy 39Vd ANV14 68x enue W 621429 Z Wd pu EXC FL Ja epu YO we pue 2454 4 aud su ar w3 Ladd BORO lt HOG L2 ur wug qp z TUN Ub PUO dtto Z FAG 66 y Z JO A qwiasse 10129 9p pasinay 196 18 22 enbi4 aug yaco W wd 7 emm A eA EL yum m agr anam nap ELE Fan y Eam Fat wm CU GUN CR TURN RN RUM RUN CUM TR ee ee ee A a Ww a mee 77 7124 epp mmrararqmrepypamcsctprqoercqn L I 0I CTI I A 2 e Rom daa e T AT R fadi de o fe I o T jd Rn Romo R
9. 24094855 OE WV mappu palo 0645 deg eo 2008771 1 UNS LINKS OLI Lo Papo aq Fey hori Cu AD jaune opt rk se ox QW da Cose i FONTE NE mmm b eem en OY d TOM cem aem si Qum 03 OO Oe WR gm wem DANO CE WOR WO FJSQLUD Lia GANE eK jquiesse 0 309 seo Z0G PESTI 0 22 einig 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 40 pjepuegs uonein6ijuo 806 TE ZZ n 1003 Bu R seau gn PIEL 6123130 spi Nox 599 pua au GOH 19043 Xs onip aay acc gt Iv dal a nl n s tpu Qi res la ol 4 f lg epca rest 290 4 cay eris acg e3 965 v 36 ya pua wer sexus rS 9 5 sn5 mra 6 taaz FON 4 500 299 OL ys u Beg ued Amy mawo Bugune papa men 5 BU wee ja aur m un4 yong Akins yoy PUD oe S 3 3 Co vw BLE Cu DNO We scc UA Xj b 1 Ls roya OL SRY 99 wp DL 9 OW HPU nad muda amus
10. OZE ESTT 6 00 einig Ub4 sor 300955 gt you 13061 epis Tab 8345335 yee ded Bou vis TT W 2214291 Z Wd 401210105 012913 oway quiesse aqoid 08 Op cc eJnfiJ gil ajoe s 9 wwo mb 6553 pba do 10g Sear 123249 Ud 7 IEF UDA gt GOZ Uum wu AKS 20 irom eu IAS p epo OWE B BO I 4M 2101420 pInOUP Cui C T4 Dru cupienti n Bem DURAM lora DRO aq 1 MEM uD Xx uyws p 204 mag Brynow E v TA aem Ua POM WU om eA dm re menu 8 a 199 Goes ur quac eal 90 72 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL 39Vd ANV14 Ly CC enue W 6214291 Z Wd 225 5 219 2 episiepun 5 12 0245 UO eqp 291 AQ 21 0 ypa Ajbi3edsa axbads au joysu U2 9 jn2 uauj spo 3394403 JsyDads Suy jj yep 30 oep ses By enss puibuo TINO p b l si sy 6 0 Uld y
11. 0 06 018 doim auim QZ JpU M SUIS 0 04 Ug 2201 24 jn2 spsoagq UMOYS SD A J y uo 941 01 1595012 1 BY AO 241 0 5 5 Sl 104 0215 axDadE SIU u j0 oonpur Aojod S ayy 1091 FON v S10 SuluO S 22ubjsiSay 4 U 51 8540190909 T 2 d gm m perj 59 COGLNZ Qo BH zo p eS aou ass N quiasse 39109102 994 1942119 500 Tp zz 2494 23204 apis uapjos 200 281 3NE T4383 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 8 22 W 2514291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Sjueuoduio 499211 POO ZESTI p Zz 9nB14 p 81045159 suo 5 2 SPOIDYOUDIW ui s SALON ca JN 13384 res p A 85883865 OTHERWISE 1 ALL IS IN 5 RESSTORS ARE 1 4 WATT 5 UMEESS 1 ML CAPACITANCE 8 MIROFARADS amp OTES 22 49 PCM 2 Technical M anual He fp RITE SN iw P omg A E 3 307 ADORESS BAUD RATE TO SHEET Figure 22 43 11
12. wt hA 3 BLOW MND AQUAM lb uunia 9496 1 3 THY Pupueteo GOO UUNIN 207 9900 3267 40 HOS ay des 3301 det Nb pul MODO 241 wouxxd puo OO MY use di f31 ay yin H204 PAID Sumu y god 1452 p Busi faa meu quer me tq papag di 3 wa cum 42495 Aouelumurj aui yo 2102 mug pea p gap omnl yeouusdda purses 24 ceo puunu uyan q yaer 3HUUSEY Z 4 ur Spun eipusH Laz Z om eme 5140 uc mague val 3 aajo 09 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL Jo T A quiesse 03002 S522 V 089 6 22 aunbi4 SON 57094525 Ds SZHHOS gt bw 4 T P I aou aot 207 420 HOF L2 REESE Ld 4007 9905 1 3 bw ms Fag Buma wire ELEPESLEGZ armas A OD BOD
13. 2 Technical M anual This diagnostic utility verifies that all microprocessor based boards within the instrument respond correctly In addition it displays the software version numbers for all boards If morethan one version of the modular detector board software isin usein the PCM 2 the communications check result for the M D Bs will read M ultiple V ersions If all the software versions are the same the software version number will be displayed If the voice annunciator option is installed this test may be used to verify that the voice board is functioning properly T his test cycles through every message in voice board memory A potentiometer R14 on the voice board may be used to adjust volume ThePCM 2 supports a bank of four remote annunciators an alarm light a ready light a recount light and a horn If remote annunciators are used this test verifies that they are functioning properly T histest waits for an entry from the badge reader and then echoes the number received on the screen If a badge reader is not installed or if it doesn t seem to be working properly the operator must enter a number via the keypad to exit this test D isplays the current status locked or unlocked of the entrance and exit gates if any Note T Access Control Gate Check feature supports PC M 2 s Access Control Gate option PT 5 and OPT 5A Access Control on page 19 24 A Timeand date information are included in all re
14. Ae pm Qo CC CAI Of ut ap Oy RANGER IN NOLDIRCRHING SH Cu Ttva INS SY FILHO Tres AAO JHL IATE OMNI SOS 133G iei 04 INGA 1335 7 LETC enue W 6214291 Z Wd 7402 NOUVB9I3NOO9 31545 1 599 s 2 01 vas E LI H 1060 0011 29 2 Wi fis z N rss ss ar z amp OM Z y T sepu 95 910 sau zi jou a Ga mau ici La 690 953 sed buque Ad ns 2 as apis sog son juawabheuew seb gt Buiqunid 805 ZE 7Z aunbiy rac ound pan diazo OZ 09 Z OPIS jenoux3 59 C MQ vEeiL 29 ety so5 sez Pa pue euj sseu oM ex peus pod jb pog ieu es minime 1 s lt e 90 Q 20499 puo Sayu es oes apu 96 su a6und womb pue 6 B tO TfSi 4e A ery ras fps ggn 300 01 102104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 85 W 2514291 Z Wd 401210105 012913 oway 15 ppe pesTT an
15. 2 See Hele HED SOLDER ar 28 5 Figure 11 2 11526 009 Front panel board components A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 11 12 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation General Description Theory of Operation Special Functions Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 12 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface T his printed circuit board provides conversion of an RS 232 interface to an RS 485 interface It supports bidirectional half duplex communication The RS 232 transmit signal is input at 2 pin 2 and converted to TTL by A100 M AX233 chip T his signal is then converted to RS 485 levels by 102 D 53695 The RS 485 communication protocol requires that if a device is not transmitting the transmitter must be turned off his is accomplished by a comparator A101 T LC372C used as a one shot Each time a high level character bit is sent by the transmitter the one shot will turn on thetransmitter for the duration required to send one character T he baud rate must be selected by SW 1 SW 4 resistors R2 to R7 in conjunction with C4 providethetime constant during which the transmitter is turned on See T able 12 1 The same comparator that enablesthe transmitter also disables the receiver Table 12 1 Baud Rate Selection SW 1 4 SW1 4 Closed Baud Rate 1 X 4 800 2 X 9 600 3 X 19 200 4 X 38 400 All others open PCM 2 setting TheRS 485 transmitter and re
16. ete tta en Cd tob qn 9 5 Chapter 10 Hardware Complement Sheet 10 1 iv PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Contents FrontPanel Board visae 11 1 General D escription scuro treten aede t de ad 11 1 CIFCUlE D eser Pet 11 1 Keyboard DDte 2 x 11 9 H ost Communications Port Configuration 11 9 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface sis 12 1 General D escription 12 1 Theory of O 12 1 Special EUR CONS 12 1 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface Parts 19 12 2 Modular Detector Board 13 1 General 13 1 External CODPeetOfie uuo traten t arias 13 1 Circuit D ecHpEODus crt ida tr dee rid 13 2 Setup and Calibration nes 13 2 Threshold 13 3 M odular D etector Board Parts List 13 4 Clock Display Board sssri 14 1 General D escription Pe RR P tae 14 1 Traffic Light Board Locros o mision iudei Sonar 15 1 General D escH DET oo Mosi Dae dea Die e hatch 15 1 Detectors coins merit dini o id dian d 16 1 General D escri UOI 16 1 Design Configuration 16 2 Mantenan A 1
17. 3Tw SNI 34v ONY 2 NHN IYO SI dL 304 G NYEL 3192459 NOM UIKE SI HOB Fc SHL G M 259 13 CHF COLY Z 2 g gt a FRAS ISMHIHID 5537161 EI 28v SAMA SONVISISSM 1 SION IL W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy SJUBUOWOD a2ejle1ul 68 54 03 ZEZ SU POO TSHTT Ltt NBI 109 1671 __ vf ec W je91u429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy peoq J02839p Je npo W TOO EPSTT 8 22 eni A 6 E 8 95 EI ispLeLio xg FL e CZ E agun 4 824030423 ay n HE fa 2 ul Bout T 2Z W je91u429 7 Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL Sjueuoduio 1032939p Je npo W 00 6 2 en iJ 3200 69611 9412993 cn T e W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy 25 PUGAY 10 Je npo W 900 EPSTT 0 2 4 TTTTTTTIT TNT Figure 22 11 11534 150 Clock display board 22 15 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 9r enue W 6214291 Z Wd quiesse 3ueuoduio2 god e dsip 32010 TST PESTT ZT ZZ n IJ peijpjsu s pejueule dus Ayuso JOU BI 2 LSLPSSLIdA
18. od Lr Pata Ladd BORO lt HOG L2 ur wug qp z TUN Ub PUO AON Z FG 66 i bi 2 Cr Z JO Ajquiasse 196 91 22 4 ae PORE ea Ce i RET T akiaki L2 77 BALET L Teak NR TIT COR SN A FACE FIF EE EEE EEE EERE TEE EE REE E gt 7 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L a mw tamd wah corona ns chown Cent ar Figure 22 17 11534 561 Revised detector assembly medium 2 of 2 22 21 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 4444 enue W 6214291 Z Wd 10 T EWS Aiqwasse 0 2 Pasinay Z0G pESTT 81 22 N ns a M X MA 28 es t Jo 3 7 is 2 v E pe ESI IEN E RAT Fr SEILE ar y d 55 tad fora o 1 69 4 gt 5 Y E E E E 1 Fu AMY y Sp SS See 3 TORO 140 amp WMG ewd 402104105 uo1pe 3
19. weight factor and Rnew the most recently measured real background count rate measured in a single count interval W hen the instrument is occupied some detectors are shielded from local radiation sources that account for part of the observed background T he shield factor is defined as background while occupied divided by background while unoccupied Note Alpha channel shield factors are always equal to 1 A T hefollowing values are displayed but may not be edited Current background count rates for this channel 2 Technical M anual 5 5 Edit Fixed Count Time M ode Alpha amp Beta Alarm Levels Alpha amp Beta RDA Lower Limits Count Time Fixed Count Time Mode System Parameters Alpha amp Beta RDA Upper Limits 5 6 2 Technical M anual N amp count rates above background at which this channel will alarm based on the current backgrounds RD As confidence level sigma factor amp c The minimum RDA values that could be specified for this channa given the present backgrounds count time confidence and sigma factors The shortest count time that this channel can use to detect the specified RDA at present background levels In Fixed Count T ime mode the confidence factor sigma factors and count time are specified when the PCM 2 is set up In addition upper limits for alpha and beta RD Asareentered If background count rates are or become too high to permit reliabl
20. 200 9E ZZ eni 2494 23204 apis uapjos 200 281 3NE T4383 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L Figure 22 37 11534 236 Gas bottle enclosure assembly 22 42 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation r cc W je91u429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy C 10 T Ajquasse jesuedsip auajAyjadog OZE ESTIT 8 00 eni apas 14083 101 Addns S eae o 41 350 MIA fOr eui epu sepnod psjpununquoo Aur 99 3 m Jepua 4 ger dn mam m ND NOY Cp MOF FO JO nus you 520 doc RYDGES puo Mud sin Spm WOO eq gm am O bejd su pneu 184205 usiub mago 101 0 Grid Lo v MM 24 ado jo 802 en PUD ado hanam A26 dom SOD pus uat JU wu 2202 du pp Ws pazode ponda adi 0 0 Lay anba 7 jy QUEDA 9528 z NOd 9150 WOR San maj 6i sje pepulous f3ejou ees Qao anual 61 020 P W 2521 4291 Z 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy C 40 Z Ajquasse Jasuadsip
21. Aiquasse Japeal epooeq euJedu e pe GT T 29 22 isis senes smash 10 Ria DK D atapa 207 1104 Aquiessops Emu DerjcYRL Med Adm dii lOi MD Weg JO debe SUE IS RIY prt sha ame fem TOM W p CR dp Dani E iic su CQ finus Ono pau PIS KUTIA days Dy ICO pESIL fuat PAK 24620 12004 yj o01 ajou I LL W je91u429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy oge pe ar T 9 27 aunbi4 dis 409 91 Y S7 ZH 09 OWA GIL Japoay 108 1900 225 Vv NF tW Ao YYYYYYYVWVY CN lt ENTS xog 1004 34013 p USE epus yey i 001 x DIP 092 v L pesn suid pb Duran xouugs josy 2085 asp 4 140 OS sus 20 oq suequinN 585 HOG s
22. Gower Panel shown id b iul i WE 4 24 ze 5 id i EE Her 1 adea SRM FES SASS ref ad 6 2 SCHH2510 4 req d 2i t iz 3 ew i d B gma n is lt A 8 BH Ke He 8 L1 4 a i 3 a ji 3 22 84 PCM 2 Technical M anual SOHHMYMO 4 raqa ZP11534424 ref 1 Detal scala Figure 22 77 11534 480 Overall assembly access control 2 of 3 Entry Gale Cordicsratian shown Thermo Electron Corporation 8 22 W 2521 4291 Z WOd u01 e10d109 uoJ9 3 Owy JO 59276 JQU SSE e19 Q 087 81 22 Ajquiassy Buried 038g Buynoy 0 11 290 ge buie yun Z W24d uo bmi H ICZBWA uic xo 3 Lf WW oog ddn yaa Jacy doy juod 2940 do 1 42 0100125 59 z 3001H825 2 982 Jes puo ucotog 340 45 1040440 PESHES sajou jaaye ass 98 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL JO T Alquiasse uoi Ms sjepjnous s pear gpG pesTT 60 22 ein6i 299 Hedy om 2900 sepu 20 7 jeeus aes un HETTIE lss PT IL E i iH 5 is 43 i E i i i EE FH iiy HH 1
23. 2 T 190 1090 cena Fear tX o ses orie 76 see totes ond 7 4 Lsbel Supp Hames Lire End Lote Eva Une O M erncde are IS 9 refer to ne ham numbers on PCU 2 s p A dev 620 utin To X tem 070 office te De h ten GM vet s R port 4 Prody iubel len pinoi wives wih wording sheen 10 kaniy volves functi wa have nc polerty Solder 720 wie to rasion ot side joria cli voh ux shom using bat ber me occ c 630 c to et C Aisertiy Use test 12 reisi dem JUD correcter iz correrter on 370 Figure 19 31 11534 348 Gas manager assembly drawing 1 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 64 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features 9er EY rer Purge Inlet Normal Inlet Vent Volve Old Atlernate Valve Detail tubing and wires have been omitted for clarity Figure 19 32 11534 348 Gas manager assembly drawing 2 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 65 Options Optional Features Spare Purging Detectors Spare Purging Detectors Parts List 19 66 PCM 2 Technical M anual OPT 15 Spare Purging D et
24. 599 5514 290 07 EU 1 Refer to DOM YP1153434 Right Assemt y mown The 2 Leveler Actuolor SCHNOO2B Hex Nut 4 50520025 Spit Washer SCHH2512 HH Screw SCFWOO25 Fict Washer T SCHNOO25 Hex SCHH2512 Serew SCFWOUZO Flot Washer SCSPOO25 spit Washer E located on Ye opposing aid pin length protruding oa shown 3 sat 2 Cop of shown wh 4 Install Rall Fin into shaft fram side sho laming 2 of Left Front Caster Bracket Right Front Caster Bracket nol ahown A 2211534279 Show Front Cqaler Subeseam Left Front Assembly Front is mirrored image 2 require 1 Lofi Right 2 Reor Costera requ Reor Coster Subassem g Ring HOMAIT2 Light Screw Machina Mount SCMN20 Jam Nut 3 3 8 HORRI Retolnin 2 Y 1 8 N T 8 ag RETE E 89 BER these 2 areas use Lubriplate 70 Let Ring P s i Lubcote ground sockst head screws 7211534274 Glide Braet HMO4529 Roll Fin 386 ole 4 STEP THO STEP E ti iii DH gt E Figure 22 58 11534 340 Swiveling casters assembly 22 64 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation S9 CC W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy jquiesse Japead pled Wasul 2 EZE P
25. BRIO v rod so 91 050 Gt I 801 21 si 21 p 5 ET ES 4 1 gt Pd 6 as X at at Th Ty 3 lv Wy Bes ful abg xs MER E e LIOA 9001 B POH Een uy 1899 201689 jo 1908 APRONS F VEZ W 2214291 Z Wd 401210105 012913 oway 55 Hulquin d 3sneuxa Se TLE YESTI 62 22 91614 UCM mee 19401 Pao xd RD mg F1 B8 T 146 1 12320 gm 420 PRI J 9 9 CL logit APPS 1947 Y qus pod 01 mq j m JT AOR luba A01 yl puUOH 1 f HA wee 1 af a e J zi JE EIS 481 al E att val 8 42 9 BS ps Pu RH puud pA T d WUR Yeu ob Ue s o0 PUD 600 g ym 20102 di 52 a p s U qan 2504 bugdno3 X rb Loan We Cul buad geg wall JETER RS ang PRU iu DUM Pus AL Bend uses REL T 324 Roo 940120 54 fatexocec ac Pua 5 4 1 P zx 00 Joye NUI DOISUS L SIRN GEC enue W 16214291 Z ess seowoo 400005 OSE
26. Calibration Zero Pressure Reference Reset 19 60 PCM 2 Technical M anual Pressthe knob to accept the displayed choice If Yes is accepted another window will be displayed in which the desired purgetime may be set Rotate the knob until the correct value is displayed then press to begin the purge cycle Another Yes N o screen will offer to reset the long term gas use counter Again rotate the knob to make a selection then press it to accept When initially setting up an instrument initiate a detector purge and adjust theflow valveto approximately 800 cc minute Allow a minimum of 4 hours at this purge flow rate to completely purge all of the PCM 2 s detectors Reset the flow rate thereafter to approximately 150 cc minute for normal operation This step should only be performed if the gas manager s pressure transducer is replaced or if nonzero pressures are displayed when the instrument is actually at zero pressure Resetting the zero reference when there is actually pressure in the detectors will result in higher than desired operating pressures and may damage both the detectors and the pressure transducer 1 Before resetting the zero reference disconnect the system exhaust hose from the gas manager T his will insure that the pressure transducer is actually at zero i e atmospheric pressure Press the control knob to obtain a password prompt Instead of the normal 1287 password enter a value of 9
27. Caution T his mode of operation will alarm on very low levels of contamination Experience has shown that it is often impossible to verify alarms maximum sensitivity mode using a hand held frisker For this reason this mode of operation is not normally used A Minimum Count Time Theminimum count time is determined automatically for a fixed false alarm probability and RDA with its associated confidence level All detectors will count for the full count time as determined by the channel requiring the longest minimum count time ThePCM 2 setup program recalculates all affected operating parameters whenever a user defined variable is changed and gives immediate indication of the affects of the change D uring operation whenever background levels increase to the point that the statistical parameters cannot be maintained the instrument is taken out of service and a high background alarm is issued Test Mode modeisa collection of menu driven routines that are used to perform diagnostics observe count rate information edit parameters perform source checks and calibrate the monitor Routines are selected using a System of pull down menus and hot keys M any of the procedures are automated and only requires the user to establish setup parameters As an example the computer generates high voltage plateaus without any need for the technician to adjust or measure high voltages or record data T he computer manages these functions and
28. Edit Detector Parameters False Alarm Rate T hisisthe percentage of users who will see false alarms given the current set of parameters T he d amp ector voltage may be adjusted in steps of approximately 10 volts Background count rates are multiplied by thisfactor before being used to test for detector sensitivity T his converts average background count rates into count rate per unit area in order to compensate for differences in detector size T his is used only for channel sensitivity calculation D etectors marked as inactive will not be used in any computations T his may done to keep the instrument operating if one detector fails Particles that cause the detector to produce a pulse exceeding this voltage will be counted as alpha particles Lower amplitudes register as betas Particles that produce pulses below this amplitude will not be counted as either alpha or beta T heratio of counts per disintegration expressed as a percentage Contamination of this activity level will be detected with a probability equal to the system confidence level D etectors which show background levels above these limits will be considered too noisy or contaminated to use and will removethe instrument from service D etectors with backgrounds below these levels are assumed to have failed Theinstrument will not count if this occurs T his parameter controls the speed with which the computed average background rate will follo
29. To use this feature first specify a D ayFileD irectory using the field Day File D irectory in the Instrument Configuration edit screen If this field is left blank and day file storage is enabled the files will be stored in M ainD irectorAD IRYY where M ainD irectory is where the PCM 2 system files reside T he directory may specify a drive but is only necessary if a drive other than the main drive is used For example if the main driveis C and the day file directory is specified 0 or C DATA the day files will be stored in CAD AT AD IRYY If the main drive is C and the day file directory is specified as AAD AT A the day files will be stored in A DATA DIRYY Note T ake care not to terminate the string with a backslash e g A PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 19 Edit RadNet Parameters 5 20 Day File Directory Storage RadNet Parameters RadNet Transmission RadNet Server Address Normal Transmission Frequency Abnormal Transmission Frequency PCM 2 Location PCM 2 Technical M anual Note If one floppy drive isin use either alone or with hard disk DOS will allow the floppy drive to be named A or B If the floppy is specified by default as A which is normally the case and it is to be used for day file storage do not define the day file directory as using drive B e g BADATA A N ext enablethe desired file storage by toggling the three menu items under the D ay File Directory Sto
30. eats 7 1 Decks caste Comas a 7 1 Background Plateau 7 2 SOURCE v ctr ara ei St sn 7 3 Special Considerations 7 4 e aa ones 7 6 Sel ds e eee an En 7 7 Statistical Variance T est 7 7 False 7 7 Calibration Report 7 7 Chapter8 Ut eS arci iid 8 1 Detector D ownload xis eret Deor ps 8 1 Front Pana DA vientos irte tA dant 8 1 Communications Check se ee 8 2 Voice Annunciator T eSt oca ot ri S t bcp ord 8 2 Remote Annunciator T 9b usse adorti vite catis dae red vd 8 2 Badge Reader ES Sea es eet vnde 8 2 ACCESS Gate CHECK ouest tud amber iaa ia OSA 8 2 uote eritis cena gov Ea Ded sa 8 2 CUE COL ONS oir dvo boe m tutes tert bmi bata buda 8 2 UR cr 8 3 STR Fl 8 3 NNUS 8 3 rari vid oig 8 3 Chapter9 Maintenance cssisassccsississsissssessrsssassivessivenssseansiveesivdsssvsivivnsrevnisaes 9 1 Preventative M 9 1 A EROS 9 2 Decontamination C leaning 9 3 Detector obra nce 9 3 QUICK PUGS nde eof a 9 3 T FOUTS
31. meters refer tc Ie rombes ce GOM CH 5 1 J of 071 kon laje spiced Few 190 rod core y EPUM sel ut paa euch end eh ial cum thon ores kae Markis Mops ae Me edm of api aed the moi caw Pe rerun hom the sof ihe scree ur the phuc c fl witin the ral core aca het 5 wordy thet fe pup 153 Gree bers cw 9t for tte ret pre Beda De TUS op hew cote ibe A ia onde 0 Tp Ua rol most Poe Wap di vao Hin Figure 19 25 11534 320 Polyethylene M ylar dispenser assembly drawing 1 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 52 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Gas Bottle Enclosure Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features fom 4 Vane 7 J 270 3 ref ot gt a 099 5 be 2 610 e retd 5 lt ot eo 47 y 1 1 0 amp lt 0 P T 55 f us Figure 19 26 11534 320 Polyethylene M ylar dispenser assembly drawing 2 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 9 Gas Bottle Enclosure This option for the PCM 2 is an independent sheet metal enclosure to support storage of two Size counting gas cyli
32. per 11534 0479 Gate Ass y per 11534 D478 TE TT g 28 7711534436 Floor SCHH2510 4 req d Figure 19 15 11534 480 Access control overall assembly drawing 1 of 3 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 33 Options Optional Features 1 ort belal Qr SISTED ak eres Duo Qut Dew Pro Am 15 bo ml Gel Orek Eceb fetry Coriaria shen Quai amp mzs 11 19 34 PCM 2 Technical M anual 1 Reker w cog COT M Genie ek ee Foce ew ofe cable rio Here Fort thoegh the cutter Garena vert tng of fe Cava Moet wed cobi vp through hows Te pod cc Mion De gore a fe Q Vaf 0 cm mj potre o fe ode n acer a4 hat Leys gebe Mut eec oie fur oig mer i emer Pa sei o Pme ih m Sop emm over fw the pe ext wide town ow nesle c bape Than quide ager pas ila buf beregi nariai b fe tang Fon aed im sieh cmm io inima Post id ed cf 2d gut UM Fw oven lier ism ann 2 s Ta vwd were Peri spisi wilh mean fae Top A
33. tee i beck inia Ife bee tore 202 Tang ane ter 120 Doer Keys peste ond Te band eva 106 ced 200 piace is oom si ex High Heel Perforated Grid Base Plate 19 56 PCM 2 Technical M anual NL 16 Me Figure 19 28 11534 236 Gas bottle enclosure assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 11 H igh H eel Perforated Grid Base Plate The 1 4 diameter perforated grid base plate option serves as a simple substitute for the standard slotted base plate in support of users with high heeled shoes T his perforated grid configuration reduces the open area over the foot detector to 5896 Thermo Electron Corporation High Heel Base Plate Parts List Gas Management Theory of Operation Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features T able 19 18 liststhe items incorporated in the high heel base plate and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 18 High Heel Base Plate Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No Part Description Part No 010 11534 D175 Footplate Perforated Grid YP11534175 OPT 12 Gas M anagement concept gas proportional detectors are very simple In the real world however seals leak and materials come with random flaws In practice detectors require a constant flow of counting gas primarily to overcome the following Lossof coun
34. 0 00 WEI FACTOR 50 0 WEI FACTOR 10 0 SHIELD FACTOR 1 00 Calculated Val ues Calculated Values BACKGROUND CPS 0 00 BACKGROUND CPS 0 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 RDA LEVEL DPS 1 00 RDA LEVEL DPS 1 00 High Voltage Thedetector voltage may be adjusted in steps of approximately 10 V not to exceed 1750 V Geometry Factor Background count rates are multiplied by this factor before being used to test for detector sensitivity T his factor converts average background count rates into count rates per unit area in order to compensate for differences in detector size T his factor is used only for channel sensitivity test calculations 5 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Alpha amp Beta Channels Active Alpha Threshold Beta Threshold Alpha amp Beta Efficiencies Alpha amp Beta High Fail Alpha amp Beta Low Fail Alpha amp Beta Weight Factors Beta Shield Factor Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Detector Parameters D etectors marked as inactive are not used in any computations T his may be done to keep the instrument operating if one detector fails Particles that cause the detector to produce a pulse exceeding this voltage are counted as alpha particles Lower amplitude pulses are registered as betas Particles that produce pulses below this amplitude will not be counted as either alpha or beta The ratio of counts per disinte
35. 2 Technical M anual 9 7 Maintenance Troubleshooting Contaminated Detector 9 8 2 Technical M anual H ardware induced high count failures exhibit the symptom of a noisy channel evidenced by excessive count rates T he count rates can be observed in the View Background Averages or View G ross Count Rates selections in the T est mode menu If high count rates exist in only the alpha or beta channel but not in both channels the problem is almost certainly on the M DB which should be replaced O therwise the problem could also be caused by a poor high voltage connection resulting from the M D B not being properly seated onto the detector or by the detector s anode wire arcing to ground If the latter isthe cause the detector must be rebuilt Low count failures can be caused by insufficient flow of counting gas If adequate pressure and flow exist a leak in the plumbing circuit or a rupture in the M ylar window of the detector could cause loss of counting gas Other causes of low count failure include broken anode wires in the detector or component failure on the M D B By swapping the M DB with one from a good detector zone the problem can be segregated to either the M DB if it follows the board to the other zone or to the detector if it remains with that zone Note Whenever an M DB is replaced the D etector D ownload routine must be invoked to restore the correct parameters to the affected detector A Contaminated D etect
36. CORTA J fena fga bariy kiy Dus upper beeing jojon of e Ames eme fm Fren ap sda asats POR Z ond Sae access Demirel Colina eM meeting FUN T Nom PM Vide Light eriy e RED Nye qu be p 4 4 d y PONI Cox Cal firepit akira Bes ry Cota tmp Una abenan mmi nici Fig bam EXC 8227 dde dne tim EMT cive Be olv 3 male Dwal Wee Dosen eos viri Figure 22 52 11534 478 Access control ceiling assembly 22 58 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 65 22 W je91u429 7 Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL quuasse 59366 10 102 55927 6Lp pEGTT 86 22 9614 003 aps e ad Z OPH ZY stay Euy HED JARON 4297 OLOOLIOS PAd e Pers COLI MSOS wm 01008715 mm 427 e LOSS Lida ped uid aea wr ZAM 9 Lid Arn eK Utes g MOD Zzvb GL dA e sac wies OLOLHEXS HON 154 01008205 woe Jed x yar pe Cg idi p ym e gt ald 9445 10071 542450 e M
37. uo saguru 48121 6 paduz L S310N 50 150 pod supnbs 5206 poy apoyos 8 yaya apouo 5 ualuM QF JO adwos 4 123 3 D D 7 gl YAR OF Cm 2112293 EN 1591 285 FA D 04 090 dace y 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L LIC W 16514291 Z 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L A qwasse 31940902 994 14611 2144011 ZST VESTT ET ZZ eni vo 65 6 00 9 SAequanu J39j34 p3o 3 203 SION 020 8T 2Z enue W 6214291 Z Wd 4 C 32 52d pup agau s 99 301 jquiesse 10 2 Pasinay 09G pEGTT HT ZZ eni bi 091 z 080 oum 824 102104105 uo1pe 3 oway L erc enue W 6214291 Z Wd s qim Z 40 z Buoj K quiesse pasinay 09G PESTI ST ZZ N apa Pg 3041 pub SD Z Oa imum PMA Z FO SITY COLI aed 0959751194 MY T do E Fia E 402104105 UO1322 3 oway L 02 22 enue W 6214291 Z Wd Ju e Y Ja epu we puo 2454
38. 0 050 BETA SENSITIVITY 0 10 RDA CONFI DENCE 95 MAX COUNT TI ME SEC 60 SI GMA FACTOR 4 00 BACKGROUND SIGMA FACTOR 4 00 ALPHA SUM ZONE ALARM DPM 1400 BETA SUM ZONE ALARM DPM 7000 ALPHA SUM CH ALARM DPM 5000 BETA SUM CH ALARM DPM 30000 Calculated Values COUNT TIME SEC 1 00 FALSE ALARM RATE 0 1 The detectable activities used to compute alarm set points for the alpha and beta channels V alues entered here will be copied to all detector channels Individual detectors may later be changed D etector parameters are normally set via the O verride Parameters screen Values entered on this screen will be written to all detectors any entries made previously to a single detector will belost Parameters for a single channel may be examined or adjusted through the D etector Parameters screen by using the arrow keys to select the desired detector See D etector Parameters on page 2 10 Detector 0 Parameters Min Count Time M ode HIGH VOLTAGE VOLTS 1600 GEOMETRY FACTOR 1 00 Alpha Channel Beta Channel ACTI VE Yes ACTI VE Yes THRESHOLD MAX 45 THRESHOLD MAX 5 EFFICIENCY 90 22 0 EFFICIENCY 90 22 0 RDA DPS 16 7 RDA DPS 83 3 HI FAIL CPS 100000 HI FAIL CPS 100000 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 WEI GHT FACTOR 50 0 WEI GHT FACTOR 10 0 SHIELD FACTOR 1 00 Calculated Val ues Calculated Values BACKGROUND CPS 0 00 BACKGROUND CPS 0
39. Adjusting the high voltage setting will necessitate measuring new efficiencies See C hapter 7 Calibration for detailed information on high voltage settings and detector calibration Thermo Electron Corporation Quick Start Instructions Thermo Electron Corporation Installation Quick Start Instructions Reliably detectable activity RD A levels should be set to the values required by plant administration RD levels can be edited in D etector Parameters O verride Parameters or System Parameters Edit System Parameters As noted above RDA levels can be set for all channels in this screen If M ode 2 is being used this parameter is RDA U pper Limit D efault values are 5 000 dpm for the beta channels and 900 dpm for the alpha channels TheRDA confidence should be edited if it isto beother than the default value of 95 T he count time max count time in M ode 3 is set in this screen Edit Instrument Parameters T he preferred count rate units counts per second cps or counts minute cpm activity units dps or nCi and count mode are set in this screen he three counting modes are Model Preset All Mode2 Maximum Sensitivity Mode3 Minimum Count Time If reporting or logging of data either locally or over a network installation is desired additional parameters will need to be configured in this screen See Instrument Configuration Parameters on page 5 16 for more information on configura
40. e N Li N N 5 m 2 o o e 192 2 PDF compression OCR web optimization with CVISION s PdfCompressor LC 2214291 Z Wd 401210105 012913 oway L SOAIND 3 1 eoid 8 22 4 d 9064 23 ezed 4 39 24 71x3 OSA Z OT SdO lt 5 9 udriu OSET 5310n 0061 53101 0021 0 0 HOP up init m 93 H Ag Ul Ag piouseJui g pojysaiy 2 Z 40493130 M Sra 53 3 58 2 git aD i i9 l l PR E 2 aig bl TEE g 58 ZR D 258 3 d ET xa Old SS x C 394 wa jJ So mc 728 Ts 488 2 a dam 7 985 LIT EL 52 1 ASS 4 Ir iN Og die set Ep _ LE 1E Cmm ES E CCB i ALINE q Le 5 oE 3 Je 8 1 hz 5 m des CES XID OOO D 27 ek s 0 1 uF af 33peF 22pF Figure 22 4 11526 003 Front panel board SP24 basic component assembly Sep Note 3 HAND SOLDER 22 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Elec
41. flows become inhibited or if you suspect a bad or dirty supply of gas he reusable disposable protective cardboard and polyethylene film covers for the foot probe of which spares are located in the internal pocket on the side door of theunit should be routinely cleaned or replaced to avoid accumulations of particulate contamination on the probe face If the optional protective film dispenser is installed this routine procedure isto advance a fresh width of film over the detector face from the supply roll T his procedure may need to be performed as often astwice daily depending on the frequency of usage and the relative cleanliness of users shoes to avoid increased measurement count times or foot detector face punctures 2 Technical M anual 9 1 Maintenance Switches 9 2 Switches 2 Technical M anual O ptical Position Switches The PCM 2 uses optical position switches for the foot side of the hip and the side of the foot T hese switches ensure the proper placement of the user during a measurement M aintenance for these switches includes making sure they are aligned correctly You can test their alignment using PCM 2 diagnostic routines M echanical Position Switches The position switch adjustment is initially made during manufacture of the instrument and is intended to be permanent under normal usage T he position switch adjustment may however change in time as a function of normal instrument us
42. per 11534330 Front Right View Figure 22 75 11534 321 Detectors installation assembly 2 of 2 22 82 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 8 7C W 6910429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy JO JOuJUOD 59276 AjqWasse e19 Q O8P PESTT 9L ZZ RUSO EXT 57094525 ICH 2 HHOS pb ax quien 261 29d Mem ico SRXLES P aqu wet my aD 435 2109 4007 NDA IA OLED baz nun Les 7 IBIS pba 1242610 buum mc cL2 cS LE az 4 0100196 vjou wei A OD BOD jg sed uero Puph 1 p bau y mM 0355 55 Glog Dore 0 10948 oag HT HS Them out e E gi Hp utar ott j nh E os t i eo i i Hl si G2 pis i iH bg 1 ih EF th RE pap fe n ME is p 1 ul i i T firs I qi piede THE Hn bak e ifti f Hk H jj d TRE H x f 2 i i1 ae 1 Refer d amp POW OPTS ond amd amd outs aver 10 front cod rk Te bug ped wet coiling os ES bow the
43. 0 291 0 333 0 402 0 469 0 556 0 726 0 953 1 22 1 50 1 69 1 87 2 08 2 24 15 0 307 0 349 0 417 0 484 0 570 0 736 0 956 1 22 1 49 1 67 1 83 2 04 2 19 16 0 321 0 363 0 432 0 498 0 582 0 745 0 959 1 21 1 47 1 64 1 80 2 00 2 14 17 0 335 0 377 0 445 0 510 0 593 0 752 0 961 1 21 1 46 1 62 1 78 1 97 2 10 18 0 348 0 390 0 457 0 522 0 604 0 760 0 963 1 20 1 44 1 60 1 75 1 93 2 06 19 0 360 0 402 0 469 0 532 0 613 0 766 0 965 1 20 1 43 1 59 1 73 1 90 2 03 20 0 372 0 413 0 480 0 543 0 622 0 773 0 967 1 19 1 42 1 57 1 71 1 88 2 00 21 0 383 0 424 0 490 0 552 0 630 0 778 0 968 1 19 1 41 1 56 1 69 1 85 1 97 22 0 393 0 434 0 499 0 561 0 638 0 784 0 970 1 18 1 40 1 54 1 67 1 83 1 95 23 0 403 0 443 0 508 0 569 0 646 0 789 0 971 1 18 1 39 1 53 1 66 1 81 1 92 24 0 412 0 452 0 517 0 577 0 652 0 793 0 972 1 18 1 38 1 52 1 64 1 79 1 90 25 0 421 0 461 0 525 0 584 0 659 0 798 0 973 1 17 1 38 1 51 1 63 1 77 1 88 26 0 429 0 469 0 532 0 592 0 665 0 802 0 974 1 17 1 37 1 50 1 61 1 76 1 86 27 0 437 0 477 0 540 0 598 0 671 0 806 0 975 1 17 1 36 1 49 1 60 1 74 1 84 28 0 445 0 484 0 547 0 605 0 676 0 809 0 976 1 17 1 35 1 48 1 59 1 72 1 82 29 0 452 0 492 0 553 0 611 0 682 0 813 0 977 1 16 1 35 1 47 1 58 1 71 1 80 30 0 460 0 498 0 560 0 616 0 687 0 816 0 978 1 16 1 34 1 46 1 57 1 70 1 79 Qualitative Measurements A typical qualitative measurement in a radiation monitoring system is a go no go determination For such a measurement an instrument is set up to alarm when a predetermined count r
44. 1 For overhead lifting a chain or webbing strap should be attached through both of these eyebolts to keep the unit upright and to properly distribute the unit s load when hoisted Caution U se appropriately rated equipment and exercise due safety precautions when lifting the PCM 2 unit in this overhead fashion A large appliance dolly with a retaining strap and incline truck can be used for moving the PCM 2 on the ground A Note Avoid rolling a PCM 2 unit equipped with swiveling casters across uneven surfaces or at rapid rates across any surface Casters are intended for quick and easy movement of the unit away from itsfixed operating position i e up against a wall or another unit to access rear and side doors T he spring loaded caster levelers provided with the caster option stop the unit from being moved over rough or uneven surfaces and should be in their retracted up positions prior to moving the unit T he casters are intended for use on smooth surfaces only A 2 Technical M anual 2 1 Installation Unpacking Counting Gas Installation 2 2 Gas Flow Adjustment 2 Technical M anual ThePCM 2 uses gas proportional detectors that require an approximate total of 200 cc min of P 10 counting gas for their operation Note T he optional gas management system reduces the gas usages significantly T wo gas inputs are provided for which supply hose feed through grommets at the rear side columns of the instrum
45. 1 barcode 02 RxD from reader 03 to reader 04 DTR to reader 05 Ground 06 D SR from reader 07 45 volts to reader 08 4V 09 Reader type sense L Xico magstripe Note T hisUART saddressis C008 A Note Pins 1 and 9 pulled low for computer identics reader A 11 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Front Panel Board Circuit Description Connector P3 H ost computer port Pinout 01 RS 485 02 RxD from host 03 T xD to host 04 DTR to host RS 232 only 05 Ground 06 DSR from host RS 232 only 07 08 N C 09 85 485 Note T hisUART saddress is C010 A Note Port may be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 A Connector P4 N ot currently used Pinout O1N C 02 RxD from external device 03 TxD to external device 04 DTR to external device 05 Ground 06 DSR from external device 07 08 N C 09 Note ThisUART saddressisC018 A Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 5 Front Panel Board Circuit Description 11 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Connector P5 Traffic light outputs Pinout Connector P6 Pinout 01 O utput bit 0 A001 02 O utput bit 1 9 A001 03 O utput bit 2 A001 04 O utput bit 3 A001 05 O utput bit 4 A001 06 Output bit 5 A001 07 O utput bit 3 A002 08 utput bit 4 A002 09 O utput bit 5 A002 10 O utput bit 6 9 A002 11 12 01 O utput bit 0 A000 02 O utput bit 1 9 A000 03 Output bit 2 A
46. 11534 319 22 22 RS 232 to RS 435 interface 11451 003 22 6 RS 232 to RS 485 interface components 11451 004 22 7 Swiveling casters assembly 11534 340 22 58 22 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Drawings Overview Description Drawing No Figure No System block 11534 344 22 33 Time delay relay switch settings N A 22 50 Traffic light PCB component assembly 11534 152 22 12 Typical background plateau curves N A 22 3 Typical source plateau curves N A 22 2 Upper electronics enclosure assembly basic 11534 375 22 34 Voice annunciator assembly 11534 313 22 45 Voice annunciator layout 11513 002 22 43 and 22 44 Wall mount remote annunciator outline 11534 531 22 49 XICO insert card reader assembly 11534 325 22 61 PCM 2 Technical M anual 22 3 Draw ings Overview BLANK PAGE 22 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 2 Approximate weight of standard unit im 680 be 300 kg 90 132 or 180 254 Vac 50 60 Hz 250 watts maximum 4 ications 1 dimenaiona are 1 8 04 em 3 Power Requirements a For Ey A H a e e a 22 5 PCM 2 Technical M anual Front View Left Side View Rear View Figure 22 1 11534 555 Instrument outline Thermo Electron Corporation 22 6 e E c gt 5 2 it a ue 2 e 4 2 e 2 o wn 2
47. 11534 D106 Cable Assembly Clock Display 2 YP11534508 404 11534 01060 PCBA Clock Display YP11534151 222 11534 0308 Plumbing Harness Gas Supply YP11534369 225 11534 0308 Plumbing Harness Gas Exhaust YP11534371 554 11534 D308 Gas Filter In line FIFH7 557 11534 D308 Tube Reducer 1 4 to 1 8 Hose FGPL56 Barbs 566 11534 D308 Flow meter 10 100 cc min MTFM 80 568 11534 D308 meter 100 1000 cc min M TFM 81 570 11534 D308 Hose T 1 8 Hose Barbs FGPL7 578 11534 D308 1 4 ID Tubing Blue PVC M M TU62 584 11534 D308 8 ID Tubing Clear PVC MMTUI 589 11534 D308 Needle Valve Flow Adjustment 151 054 11534 D314 Mounting bracket Glide Switc Cable Assembly 088 11534 D314 Mounting Bracket Foot Switch ZP11534186 092 11534 D314 Actuator Bracket Foot Switch ZP11534302 135 11534 D314 Support Bumper Footplate ZP11534353 PCM 2 Technical M anual 20 1 Standard Parts List 20 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Item Ref Drawing Part Name Description Part No No No 148 11534 D314 Nut plate Foot Switch ZP10741018 M ounting 163 11534 D314 Cover Panel Foot Switch Access ZP10741572 318 11534 D314 Lower Cable Foot Switch YP11534510 Assembly 508 11534 D314 Nylon Flange Door Pivot MM BU60 Bearing 551 11534 D314 Furniture Glide Base 112 601 11534 D314 Hole Plug Base Trim MM BZ24 602 11534 D314 Hole Plug Base Trim MM BZ26 618 11534 D314 Teflon Sho
48. 12 Og Eq 13 ea Eq 15 4 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions 8 72 _ R 2 Eq 16 Eq 17 Pu _ xus z Ex Eq 18 Op Eq 19 Eq 20 Note Equation 20 is superfluous because K is a constant which excludes it from being a variable Eq 21 252 273 m Ry 4 As overwhelming as Equation 21 may appear the reader is encouraged to note the simplicity of equations 12 through 20 that makethe derivation quite manageable Distribution Functions Binomial Distribution Thebinomial distribution is quite cumbersome to use For that reason it is rarely invoked for analysis of radiological counting exercises It is worthy of mention because the popular Poisson and G aussian functions are derived from it Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 Poisson Distribution This distribution function is approximation of the binomial distribution function and is applicable when 1 Alarge sample size is involved 2 The probability of success associated with a single element or member of the sample population is very small T heabove criteria is applicableto most radiological counting exercises T he sample size in terms of number of atoms usually will approach the order of magnitude of Avogadro s number T he probability that any one at
49. 19 32 HORA Horde 2 pic s PISS Entry Weite PCM 2 Technical M anual MCVEZBA Lack Dries Picea ert al PIO Lok Come Any par 11234713 note 4 1 FOR UA cur LED Channel cote the second 95 b oes EE E oe reis 3 tre upper LED soon Wat ie t8 perm ZPTIDISCES Cole Monde Mounting ule od Tw cobia teda Trough Tue upper gemeint WEVE2EA Uagnatic Loch Sire of YPI1334471 Lack wth baini Mogretc Look dur Ad cem YP 1334453 DR Gate Weimari 5 cmert PORE OCT A Di Gove Cr gi e One core ie is 9911530475 ewrzercey Ext Switch Cotte note 2 2P11334903 Swish Uasvieg Theres 1011934460 Emergency Eat Swi Plate SOMONE 5 pic s h Magne Lase on nmt MFO Fi wore SOSHIDIG Socket 4 pik a STOOD Lock Near a TP ISS4465 Cota Picis TUM Figure 19 14 11534 479 Access control gates assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Celing Assembly par Hon ren ger 11534 711 YP1 535447 Gate Lock Cabe Assy see 3 ne BE Br TP11534713 Gole Leck Wounting 4 req d SCMBBU gu Ext Cate Lock Housing YP11534471 Lock Cable nde 3 Ext
50. 30 3 40 3 50 3 60 3 70 3 80 3 90 4 00 4 10 4 20 4 30 4 40 4 50 4 60 4 70 4 80 4 90 5 00 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Table A 2 Cumulative Gaussian Distribution 0 00 0 5000000 0 5398278 0 5792597 0 6179114 0 6554217 0 6914625 0 7257469 0 7580363 0 7881446 0 8159399 0 8413447 0 8643339 0 8849303 0 9031995 0 9192433 0 9331928 0 9452007 0 9554345 0 9640697 0 9712834 0 9772499 0 9821356 0 9860966 0 9892759 0 9918025 0 9937903 0 9953388 0 9965330 0 9974449 0 9981342 0 9986501 0 9990324 0 9993129 0 9995166 0 9996631 0 9997674 0 9998409 0 9998922 0 9999277 0 9999519 0 9999683 0 9999793 0 9999867 0 9999915 0 9999946 0 9999966 0 9999979 0 9999987 0 9999992 0 9999995 0 9999997 0 01 0 5039894 0 5437953 0 5831662 0 6217195 0 6590970 0 6949743 0 7290691 0 7611479 0 7910299 0 8185887 0 8437524 0 8665005 0 8868606 0 9049021 0 9207302 0 9344783 0 9463011 0 9563671 0 9648521 0 9719334 0 9777844 0 9825708 0 9864474 0 9895559 0 9920237 0 9939634 0 9954729 0 9966358 0 9975229 0 9981929 0 9986938 0 9990646 0 9993363 0 9995335 0 9996752 0 9997759 0 9998469 0 9998964 0 9999305 0 9999539 0 9999696 0 9999802 0 9999872 0 9999918 0 9999948 0 9999968 0 9999980 0 9999988 0 9999992 0 9999995 0 9999997 0 02 0 5079783 0 5477584 0 5870644 0 6255158 0 6627573 0 6984682 0 7323711 0 7642375 0 7938919 0 8212136 0 8461358 0 8686431 0 8887676 0 90
51. 5 V T his measurement should betaken between pins 1 and 3 on any modular detector board connector If the connector is removed from the detector board to make the measurement the parameters must again be downloaded to that detector after reconnecting If only one P 10 gas bottle is available usea C gas T fitting to connect both counting gas inputs to the regulator With the gas pressure set at 5 psi adjust the needle valveto obtain a flow rate of approximately 800 ml minute Pinch off either inlet hose and verify that the flow rate if it changes at all returns to the same value Thermo Electron Corporation Procedures Background Checks 4 Releasethis hose then pinch off the other inlet hose 5 Verify that the flow returns to approximately 800 ml minute after releasing the hose 6 Purgethe instrument for approximately 6 hours at 800 cc min 7 Reduce the flow rate to 200 ml minute for the remainder of this checkout Note If the instrument is configured with a gas manager refer to the instructions for that option Initiate an automatic purge for 360 minutes and then operate the instrument at 0 25 of water A Allowing the unit to purge overnight is a common practice which enables the remainder of the check out and calibration to be started early the next morning Set Computer Clock Initialize the PCM 2 s computer clock to the current date and time T he date and time are included in the final cali
52. 9994623 0 9996242 0 9997398 0 9998215 0 9998787 0 9999184 0 9999456 0 9999641 0 9999765 0 9999848 0 9999902 0 9999938 0 9999961 0 9999976 0 9999985 0 9999991 0 9999994 0 9999997 0 9999998 Distribution Functions 0 08 0 09 0 5318814 0 5358564 0 5714237 0 5753454 0 6102612 0 6140919 0 6480273 0 6517317 0 6843863 0 6879331 0 7190427 0 7224047 0 7517478 0 7549029 0 7823046 0 7852361 0 8105703 0 8132671 0 8364569 0 8389129 0 8599289 0 8621434 0 8809999 0 8829768 0 8997274 0 9014747 0 9162067 0 9177356 0 9305634 0 9318879 0 9429466 0 9440826 0 9535213 0 9544860 0 9624620 0 9632730 0 9699460 0 9706210 0 9761482 0 9767045 0 9812372 0 9816911 0 9853713 0 9857379 0 9886962 0 9889893 0 9913437 0 9915758 0 9934309 0 9936128 0 9950600 0 9952012 0 9963189 0 9964274 0 9972821 0 9973646 0 9980116 0 9980738 0 9985588 0 9986051 0 9989650 0 9989992 0 9992636 0 9992886 0 9994810 0 9994991 0 9996376 0 9996505 0 9997493 0 9997585 0 9998282 0 9998347 0 9998834 0 9998879 0 9999216 0 9999247 0 9999478 0 9999499 0 9999655 0 9999670 0 9999775 0 9999784 0 9999854 0 9999861 0 9999907 0 9999911 0 9999941 0 9999943 0 9999963 0 9999964 0 9999977 0 9999978 0 9999986 0 9999986 0 9999991 0 9999992 0 9999995 0 9999995 0 9999997 0 997 0 9999998 0 9998 1W here x equals the number on the side plus the number on top PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions 12 C
53. Adjustthe switch within its mounting slots or slightly bend the switch actuator arm so that the switch makes contact upon a slight deflection of the footplate grille as occurs with the weight of a user but does not make contact when the footplate grille is in place by itself 6 When the proper switch adjustment has been made remount the access panel cover plate or return the unit to the upright position T hereare no other standard mechanical or electrical components in the PCM 2 that require scheduled repair or replacement ThePCM 2 has been designed to allow relative ease of decontamination by providing user interface surfaces and detector panels made of either stainless steel or powder coated steel T he material selection enablesthe use of water detergents and even mild solvents or abrasives in the decontamination process without damaging or reducing the working life of the detector panels surfaces Note U se of a pressurized flow of water or other cleaning agents is not recommended when cleaning the external surfaces of the instrument for decontamination Liquids under pressure can migrate into the internal electronics enclosures through seams and gaps at sheet metal part interfaces and cause potential damage A ThePCM 2 detectors do not require any specific periodic maintenance but because of the delicate nature of their thin M ylar covered faces often do require face puncture tear repair T he recommended approach to inst
54. Amplifier and Discriminator Circuits High Voltage Supply Setup and Calibration 13 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Pulses from the detector are coupled into alow impedance amplifier through a D C blocking capacitor T wo stages of amplification are used T he first stage inverts negative going detector pulses and feeds the alpha pulse threshold comparator T he second stage which is non inverting provides sufficient gain for detection of beta pulses Each amplifier output is AC coupled into its respective threshold comparator The thresholds voltages are obtained by filtering two pulse width modulated outputs from the microprocessor O ne shot multivibrators condition the comparator outputs into logic level signals with constant pulse widths Anti coincidence logic may be enabled under software control to prevent alpha pulses from also being included in the beta count or disabled for test purposes W hen aM DB isused in the hand probe option alpha and beta outputs are combined using a logic OR gate to produce click pulses CAUTION high voltage section of this board produces potentials of up to 2500 V which may remain present for several minutes after power is removed Exercise care when working on this module D ischarge the input jack to chassis ground with an insulated screwdriver before removing the circuit board from its housing A Accelerating potential for the detector is produced by an inverter and voltage multiplying l
55. Number of Digits Code 3 of 9 5 Characters Inch cpi 6 Numeric Code 3 of 9 5 Characters Inch cpi 1 to 12 Alphanumeric Interleaved 2 of 5 9 Characters Inch cpi 2to 16 Numeric Note Interleaved 2 of 5 must even number of digits A ICI Insert Card Reader Parts List Table 19 11 lists the items incorporated in insert card reader and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 11 ICI Insert Card Reader Parts List Item Ref Drawing No PartName Description PartNo No 010 11534 0323 Mounting Plate ICI Card Reader 7211534261 020 11534 0323 Cable Assembly ICI Card Reader YP11534513 030 11534 D323 ICI Card Reader Modified Bar Code ZP11468206 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 37 Options Optional Features NOTES 1 Encircied numbers reler to fine bers on BOM 4 Numbers in spots refer to ine on BOM 2 J Remove tem Bark Plole sing of hardware l0 Ram 010 Core Mounting Piste Creat unused 112 bock isto stock under 7911534295 5 4 instal imm O20 Meader Cobis in shown ond citoch to Freat Penei PZ Upper Blectromen Enclosure Assembly Figure 19 19 11534 323 ICI insert card reader assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 38 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation ICI Swipe Card Reader ICI Swipe Car
56. P11 isnot used in the PCM 2 Only onerow of keysis pulled low at atime by the outputs of A12 a 74H C138 oneof eight decoder while the five column inputs are scanned as parallel inputs to A24 Voltage Regulators Three voltage regulators are used A11 A13 and A31 A11 provides 45 V to most of the front panel board while A31 powers the R S 232 and RS 485 buffers and the badge reader if required T he output of A13 is used by the two clock display boards T hese are low voltage drop regulators that will operate from inputs of 6 12 applied to P1 Other Features Interrupts may be generated by the three communications chips under software control All three are combined into a single interrupt input at pin 13 of the microprocessor and may also be read as parallel inputs to determine which chips are requesting service Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 3 Front Panel Board Circuit Description 1 0 Connector Assignments The following is a detailed list of the front panel 1 0 pins Input and output addresses are specified in hexadecimal V refers to the nominal 12 V supply Connector pin numbers read clockwise around the board Connector P1 Pinout Connector P2 Pinout Power input and main serial data bus 01 85 485 CPU internal UART 02 5 485 CPU internal UART 03 Ground 04 4V 05 4V 06 Ground 07 Ground Serial data to from optional badge reader 01 Reader type sense L 1
57. Remote pull station for centrally unlocking the exit gates of one multiple PCM 2 access control units Personnel access through the unit is controlled by the PCM 2 s main computer by continuously monitoring contamination measurement status and assigning gate lock commands accordingly For example a user enters the PCM 2 from the left hand side of theunit in its ready to measure condition through a normally unlocked entry gate exiting the unit to the right by a normally locked exit gate is prohibited T he user undergoes the normal measurement cycle in both face in and face out body positions If the PCM 2 posts a contamination alarm for either of the measurements the entry and exit gates will remain unlocked and locked respectively allowing the user to go back to the left through the entry gate only for frisking and decontamination procedures Conversely if the PCM 2 posts the All Clear OK to Exit display after the measurement cycle the entry and exit gates are simultaneously locked and unlocked respectively and the user can then exit the unit through the exit gate to leave the facility In the All Clear scenario the entry gate 15 locked in order to disallow potential tail gaters i e those users who might try to slip through the unit unmeasured on the heels of the previous uncontaminated user For access control units configured with exit gates only O PT 5A this automatic tail gating safeguard can obviously not be realized
58. T he voice speed can be adjusted between 1 and 9999 to get the desired voice quality PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 7 Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator 19 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual To replace a wave file 1 Select the Exit to D O S function from the Utilities menu 2 Insert a floppy disk containing the new file Type copy a FileN ame W AV d pcm2 followed by Enter ReplaceFileN ame with the appropriate file name such as ANNTEST Thefile should already exist the hard disk T he system will prompt you with verwrite c anntest Y es o AII Respond by entering y and press Enter Aborted wav Alarm wav AnnTest wav ArMout wav BkgUpd wav CNTDONE wav CNTPOS1 WAV CNTPOS2 WAV DONTEXET WAV EIGHT WAVE EnterID wav EnterRWP wav ENTPOS1 WAV A standard 2 uses the following wave files Measurement cancelled Contamination detected Voice annunciator is active for testing Arm out of position Updating background please wait Count complete please exit Counting position one Counting position two Contamination detected do not exit area or use another Beta Max Call RadCom Eight Enter ID number Enter RWP number Enter position one Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation ENTPOS2 WAV FACERT WAVE FaceIn wav FaceOut wav FAILURE WAV FIVE WAV FOUR WAV HPROBE WAV IDERROR WAV IDOK wav INSHANDS WAV JOBNUM
59. UO HIJ BILA PIS L SIRN 96 22 W 2514291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL ajoway 200 67511 88 22 lea Lava Lag nomas zsa A wj nr 5 Was 150 Introduction Basic Measurement Parameters Simple Measurements Thermo Electron Corporation Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements M easurements that pertain to radioactive decay of isotopes involve uncertainties that are the result of the random nature of such decay T his randomness and the affect it has on measurements dictate that some statistical assessment of the results be made Furthermore there is involved with most measurements a signal that must be separated from background component noise with each component exhibiting its own statistical fluctuations Classical statistical models when properly applied can provide arich understanding of the events observed By applying some fundamental rules to even the most sophisticated counting algorithms use of the statistical models can be a straightforward exercise T his document attempts to illustrate what those rules are and how to apply them T he author attempts to speak to the nonstatistician and avoids complex derivations pertaining to pure statistical theory D erivations are presented where they will help clarify a technique and only as they apply to the subject of radiological measurements T hus t
60. Yes ANTI COI NCI DENCE Enabled L FOOT SWITCH REQUI RED Yes RADON COMPENSATI ON Disabled R FOOT SWITCH REQUI RED Yes RADON RATI O 0 00 SHOULDER SWITCH REQUIRED No STATUS LOGGI NG Disabled ACCESS CONTROL OPTIOM No STORE TRANSACTI ONS 0 LO LEVEL PASSWORD PRINT TRANSACTI ONS 0 HI LEVEL PASSWORD PRINTER TYPE Epson ACK LEVEL PASSWORD ALM HELP LINE 1 SOUND CARD VOLUME 15 ALM HELP LINE 2 VOICE DELAY SEC 5 USES BEFORE BKG UPDATE 0 GAS TYPE P10 DAY FILE DIRECTORY PRINTER INIT Note The PCM 2 s default gas is P10 Argon CO 2 can be used as alternative although T hermo Electron does not recommend doing so All reports generated by this PCM 2 are identified with this unit number Count rates are displayed in either cps or cpm as specified by this field T he activity units are selected to be dps dpm or nCi The PCM 2 may be operated in Preset All M inimum Count T ime or Fixed Count T ime modes his selection changes the format of several other display screens User ID and RW P numbers if used are entered via the keypad or an optional badge reader The number of seconds for which an alarm sounds if contamination is detected If the PCM 2 is connected to a host computer these parameters determine the address of this particular instrument and the communications baud rate and protocol to be used uLAN protocol may only be used with hardwired RS 232 RS 485 connections Select
61. Z 40 c Ajquasse GTE pESTI 20 an f Woyep puo jou 955 20 So asy aq S PUY DLL puoadn somo s SE pas jnuj os 121202 243 WBOd paowdn s 304 OB 04 aq yamu jexouq OL user ag jou UI y amag Wasso Sly Aquiasso apis ayy Ajquesso Bursa uoce pamba s Ajquesso sjbuj apis pub Z 7C spg ZNOd NOB Uo sus suy 1 SION Vb 9028 9 TM Oe 9 K quuessy 212960 Assy jubr apis pbo med Ajquiassy 146 Z 335 NWOHS ATANGSSY 14043 eas dm LZ gt Pu yaou ab 3 gt j E uomneJodio 012913 oway L LCCC enue W 16514291 Z 25108 Jao j994 ui dow saa o ANINSVA guiasse Yd Ms 300 3491 JUGIY GTE pEGTT 72 72 4 poo 1004 Len Pvt MINE 1004 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L Pins fi r hi n ossembly os shown e in hinge j i e 3 Install completed assembly into PCM 2 Moin Frame ossy 11534 0316 1 Encircled numbers refer to 2 Install items 102 Figure 22 23 11534 322 Rear hand detect
62. a wide range of voltages typically 1400 1900 V using long count times at least 300 seconds per voltage O nce the test has started no operator intervention is required we therefore advise running this plateau overnight PCM 2 Technical M anual 2 7 Installation Quick Start Instructions 2 8 Detector Efficiency Calibration 2 Technical M anual Once the background measurements have been completed a Plateau screen is available for each detector Page through these displays and verify that all detectors have similar voltage curves T his verifies that all detector channels have an adequate supply of counting gas and also indicates any problems involving detector channd high voltage failure or broken anode wires Note N otethe voltage range over which alpha background rates begin to increase U se the left and right arrow keys to move the vertical cursor line and note that the exact count rates displayed at the bottom of the screen are displayed for each voltage Best results are obtained at a voltage slightly below the point at which alpha background rates begin to increase A T he Source Plateau program determines the response of any one detector to alpha and beta sources Select starting and ending voltages that bracket the operating point determined from the Background Plateau results and count times appropriate to the sources to be used If large sources are available it should not be necessary to correct for backgroun
63. ain menu headings and their submenus Thermo Electron Corporation Measurement Results Transaction Report Background Averages Thermo Electron Corporation Day File Chapter 4 View A color coded diagram of the PCM 2 detector array is shown D etectors that were in the normal state at the time of the last measurement indicated in green Inactive detectors are indicated by white with out of service failed detectors shown in blue Individual channd alarms areindicated by bright red half tone red indicates sum zone alarms and the sum channel is crosshatched in red if it posted an alarm in the last measurement N umerical count data are shown for one detector that is identified by a flashing cursor T he cursor will automatically be placed on the alarmed detector that sensed the highest leve of activity T he arrow keys can be used to reposition the cursor over any other detectors T he count data shown will correspond to the detector channel that is currently highlighted Selecting this item causes report to be generated from the results of the last measurement cycle report is displayed on the video monitor and hardcopy may be produced if a printer is available Alpha and beta channd background count rates for all active detectors displayed T hese are the values currently being used by the PCM 2 for internal calculations computed with the current weighting factors Counts are updated periodically in t
64. alarms may be caused by higher energy sources Raising the alpha threshold will slightly reducethe number of beta particles incorrectly counted as alphas however the opposite error counting alphas as betas will increase rapidly Before changing these thresholds it is strongly recommended that representative calibration sources be used Ideally samples of the actual isotopes to be detected should be used to measure the changes in response to both contamination sources and background If thresholds are changed detector efficiencies should also be rechecked PCM 2 Technical M anual 13 3 Modular Detector Board M odular Detector Board Parts List Modular Detector Table 13 1 lists the items incorporated in the M D B and contains all parts necessary for normal repair Board Parts List Table 13 1 M odular Detector Board Parts List Drawing Part Ref Desig No Part Name Description Part No Ref Desig None 11543 005 Circuit Board M odular Detector ZP11543002 Al 80 11543 005 Microprocessor 83 51 ask Consult Factory A2 30 11543 005 I C Quad NOR gate 00002 40 11543 005 5 V Regulator ICAV7805 A4 50 11543 5 I C V Regulator ICAVA2950C A5 60 11543 005 RS 485 Xcvr ICCM A485 Al 11543 005 Hybrid Custom Hybrid VEBD14 70 11543 005 l C Socket 40 Pin DIP SOIC140 XA2 80 11543 005 l C Sock
65. all detector channels are counting properly the condition is caused by too restrictive a count time for the statistical constraints applied to the measurement exercise In Preset All and Fixed Count T ime modes this condition is overcome by increasing the length of the count time interval In Minimum Count T ime mode the maximum count time must be extended to correct the condition H ardware induced high background failures exhibit the symptom of a noisy channel evidenced by excessive count rates T he count rates can be observed in the View Background Averages or View Gross Count Rates selections in the T est mode menu If high count rates exist in only thealpha or beta channel but not in both channels the problem is almost certainly on the M DB which should be replaced O therwise the problem could also be caused by a poor high voltage connection resulting from the M D B not being properly seated onto the detector or by the detector s anode wire arcing to ground If the latter is the cause the detector must be rebuilt Note W henever an M DB isreplaced the D etector D ownload routine must be invoked to restore the correct parameters to the affected detector A Verify that the H i Fail and Lo Fail limits provide adequate margin for normal fluctuations in background count rate to remain between the two values T hese two parameters are found in the D etector Parameters and O verride Parameters screens under the Edit menu selection
66. board Switch to ground at Pin 4 on J1 turns on the 3 green lights and switch to ground at Pin 5 on J1 turns on the 3 red lights T wo traffic light PC BAs are mounted in the ceiling of the PCM 2 behind thetwo coincident oblong cutout sets in the ceiling trim at the front and left sides of theunit T he red lights are illuminated whenever the instrument is in its T est mode or is experiencing a failure its perational mode out of gas high background fail sensitivity fail etc and thereby serve as a visual prompt that the unit is not ready for measurement C onversely the green lights are illuminated whenever the unit is ready for measurement T hefollowing table lists the items incorporated in the traffic light board and contain parts necessary for normal repair Table 15 1 Traffic Light Board Parts List Ref Desig Drawing No Part Name Part Description Part No None 11534 C148 Circuit Board Traffic Light ZP11534147 P1 11534 C148 Header 5 Pin x 0 1 COM R1205 R1 3 5 11534 48 Resistor 150 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC151B22 R2 4 6 7 9 11 11534 C148 Resistor 220 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC221B22 R8 10 12 11534 C148 Resistor 210 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC271B22 Al 2 3 11534 C148 LED Bar Yellow 6 x 29 mm OPLP56 A4 5 6 11534 C148 LED Bar Red 6 x 29 mm OPLP55 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 15 1 Traffic Light Board General Description 0 00 C9 9 re A allal z Ag 11835 UA
67. by installing A27 or A29 respectively O nly one of thesetwo buffers may be present at a time Thermo Electron Corporation Front Panel Board Circuit Description Parallel Ports Eight switch inputs are provided each pulled up to 45 V Seven additional inputs with pull ups but without protection are distributed across two parallel O connectors and the badge reader interface T wenty channels of parallel output are available on three connectors Each is capable of sinking 0 5 amp to approximately 1 V however some limits exist asto how much total power the outputs can drive at any onetime Parallel inputs are buffered onto the processor bus by 74H C 373s at locations A23 A24 and A25 off board inputsare provided with pull up resistors however only those on P8 and P9 have resistors and capacitors which offer some protection against voltage transients Parallel outputs are latched into 74H C374s at locations A19 through A22 N inelogic level outputs are connected directly to P12 four of these are used to send data and clock signals to the two countdown clock boards All other off board outputs are buffered through U LN 2003A chips at locations A32 A33 and A34 T hese are open collector output devices capable of sinking to 250 mA and withstanding up to 50 V Becausethese are D arlington configuration outputs an O n state output of 1 0 1 5 V is normal under heavy loads T wo 4 x 5 matrix keypads may be connected to P10 and P11
68. combined alpha and beta particles being detected T he modified M D B is mounted insidetheunit on theleft hand sideof the main frame the clicker board resides in the ceiling adjacent to the PC speaker mounting bracket PCM 2 units equipped with this option include a display of the hand probe s background and alarm status whenever the probe is removed from its holder If the hand probe is removed from its cradle during background update or after the results of a measurement are posted the hand probe readings and the new alarm set points are displayed on the screen for both alpha and bea channels If the alarm set points are nonzero the hand probe readings are compared to the alarm set points If either alarm set point is exceeded the instrument begins to beep and will continueto do so until the hand probe is replaced in its cradle or until the probe reading falls below the alarm set point Setting the alarm set point to 0 disables the alarm checking for that channel T hand probe display automatically disappears when the probe is returned to its holder See Chapter 13 M odular D etector Board for detailed information regarding the modified configuration of the standard M D B used for the hand probe option Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 1 Options Hand Probe Option Hand Probe Table 19 1 lists the items incorporated in the hand probe and should contain all par
69. factors are always equal to 1 A Thefollowing values are displayed but may not be edited Alpha amp Beta Backgrounds T he current background count rates for this detector Alpha amp Beta Alarm Levels N amp count rates above background at which this detector will alarm based on the current backgrounds RD As RDA confidence level sigma factor amp c Alpha amp Beta RDA Levels T he activity levels that can reliably be detected within the allowed count time given current background rates and using the specified RDA confidence level and sigma factor Minimum Count Time Mode System Parameters In Minimum Count Time mode the alpha and beta RD As confidence factor and sigma factors are specified when the PCM 2 is set up In addition a maximum allowable count time is entered If background count rates are or become too high it will not be possible to detect sources of the specified activities the RD As within the specified maximum count time using the chosen confidence and sigma factors when this happens the instrument will display a high background failure message and cease to perform measurements until the condition clears 5 10 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Alpha amp Beta RDAs Detector Parameters Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Detector Parameters System Parameters Min CountTime Mode ALPHA RDA DPM 5000 BETA RDA DPM 25000 ALPHA SENSITIVITY
70. factory defaults T he Reset bar code is located in the separate manual that has been provided with the PCM 2 instrument if the option isinstalled A 1 1 Return to M menu Select Edit gt Instrument Setup Parameters Find ID Entry M ethod and select K eypad Aux If RWPsare used it can also be enabled T he option of masking the barcode number also can be enabled If the number isto be masked open the Utilities menu Select M ask User ID Select Y es Press the Esc key until the main display returns T he PCM 2 will indicate that background is being taken then it will display that it is ready for operation Step up into the PCM 2 It will request the User ID Swipe the card and verify that the numbers appear at the bottom of the screen if the M ask feature has not been enabled If the M ask feature was enabled then only blocks will be shown ThePCM 2 will now allow the standard measurement sequence Thermo Electron Corporation Repair ICI Swipe Card Reader Parts List Options Optional Features T he following details a repair method for the barcode system of O PT 7D 1 see O PT7D 1 ICI Swipe Card Reader on page 19 42 O pen the PCM 2 s side door turn off the unit and carefully remove the electronics cover panel ZP 11534226 item 118 so that the floppy drive is not damaged See Figure 19 22 T he scanner is located on its mounting plate ZP 11534263 T he interface modu
71. for measurement is of concern to almost all users and because dirty often equates to contaminated in radiation monitoring environments PCM 2 s detectors should be kept clean for maximally efficient radiation measurements Particulates which settle on the M ylar amp window of a detector can be blown away with a clean i e filtered dry compressed air or gas source Avoid using pressures or nozzles that may puncture the detector s M ylar amp face D etectors that have contaminated faces as a result of liquid or oil stains or residues should be removed from the unit and carefully wiped clean with a soft wiper and alcohol Again avoid any cleaning agent or practice that may puncture the delicate M ylar face of the detector T he medium sized probe located in the base of the PCM 2 is especially subject to contamination from particulates released from the shoes of its users For this reason special thin polyethylene film probe protectors are provided with the standard PCM 2 unit T en of these cardboard framed protectors are supplied in a holder located in the unit s side door T hey are installed over thefoot detector and have bend tabs for keeping them aligned atop the foot detector T hey can easily be removed cleaned or discarded and replaced U sage of these foot detector protectors will preclude most detector punctures due to dirt or pebbles from shoes and will greatly facilitate routine cleaning of the foot detector An opt
72. for optimal performance Equation 42 expresses the computation of R A m Ax RA MAX RDAx Eff PARTI Re Eq 42 Figure A 9 will be used as the basis of discussing how a counting exercise can be set up so asto maximize its desired performance Figure A 9 illustrates the relationship of R aqm n and R aqm Ax on a single number line whose domain is non negative count rates First of all it is important that R aqm iN De Kept less than or equal to R m Ax Whereas the spread of the distribution curve is determined by the standard deviation associated with it adjusting F will adjust the breadth of its curve and along with it the position of relative to the curves peak Studying the expressions for Fg and Fs the radical terms in equations 35 and 42 it should be apparent that the parameter most likely to be controlled by the operator of a radiation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions monitor isthe length of the counting interval T BecauseT isin the denominator larger values of T will reduce F T here can be several interpretations of how a counting exercise can be optimized Each is discussed separately ge Rz Rat RDA x eff T RDA x eff B A Max R B A Min Figure A 9 Basis for maximizing counting exercise performance 1 Minimum Count time Since adjusting count time also adjusts F a
73. gt 4 z 2 zo z 7 z 2 z KL amp ue B O M 11534152 Figure 15 1 Traffic light board components 11534 152 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 D 15 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation General Description Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 16 Detectors The PCM 2 uses gas flow proportional detectors also referred to as probes operating on P 10 counting gas T he standard unit supports connection to an external counting gas supply D etector pulses resulting from ionization of the counting gas are amplified and discriminated by pulse height in separate alpha and beta counting channels for each detector zone N inelarge four medium and three small detectors are used in the standard PCM 2 unit for a total of 34 detector channels the large detectors have 3 individual channels each A 0 85 mg cm aluminized M ylar amp is used for the face window of the detectors providing high sensitivity to low energy beta particles T he PCM 2 detectors have the following physical and operational characteristics Large 212 in 1368 cm window area M edium 113 in 728 cm window area Small 50 in 325 cm window area Beta Efficiency AB 25 30 contact efficiency to T c3 Alpha Efficiency 4B 20 contact efficiency to typical alpha emitters such as 239 Am ang T h 30 Note T he overall efficiency of the bottom
74. nonnegative integers which precludes symmetry T he domain is intuitive in that neither negative counts nor fractional counts are realistic Table 1 Poisson Distribution Lambda 2 5 x x gt U o 0 082085 1 0 205212 0 917915 0 256516 0 712703 0 213763 0 456187 0 133602 0 242424 0 066801 0 108822 0 027834 0 042021 0 009941 0 014187 0 003106 0 004247 0 000863 0 00114 0 000216 0 000277 Poisson Distribution Lambda 2 5 0 3 0 25 0 2 F1 o a 0 1 0 05 0 Figure A 2 Distribution described by 822 5 A 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Gaussian Distribution Function Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions An approximation can be applied to the Poisson distribution function when values of a function s mean 8 in the Poisson distribution function become larger than about 20 T his approximation known as the G aussian or normal distribution function is extensively used in radiological counting statistics See Figure A 3 It isfamiliar to many as the bell curve defined by Equation 30 operating on x 2 Eq 30 f x Jm r Figure A 3 Gaussian distribution function The domain of this function is all real numbers T he function is centered about 0 whereas a sample s distribu
75. on page 5 21 for more information on sum zones A sum is a sum zone consisting of every channel in the monitor Thealpha or beta sum channel alarm set point is the activity which must be present within the entire monitor beforethe sum channel alarm istriggered W henever the above parameters are changed the following dependent values are recalculated and displayed 2 Technical M anual 5 7 Edit Detector Parameters M ax Alpha amp Beta Channel RDA At the current background count rates these are the highest RD A for any channel in the PCM 2 with the specified count time and statistical parameters False Alarm Rate Thisisthe percentage of users who will seefalse alarms given the current set of parameters Detector Parameters Detector parameters are normally set via the verride Parameters screen Values entered from this screen are written to all detectors any entries made previously to a single detector are lost Parameters for a single channel may be examined or adjusted through the D etector Parameters screen by using the arrow keys to select the desired detector Detector 0 Parameters Fixed Count Time Mode HI GH VOLTAGE VOLTS 1600 GEOMETRY FACTOR 1 00 Alpha Channel Beta Channe ACTI VE Yes ACTI VE Yes THRESHOLD 96 MAX 4 THRESHOLD 5 EFFICIENCY 9 22 0 EFFICIENCY 9 22 0 HI FAIL CPS 100000 HI FAIL CPS 100000 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 LO FAIL CPS
76. ordering this option the user must specify the length of this cable M aximum cable length is 200 ft T able 19 6 liststhe electronic items incorporated the remote annunciator board and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 6 Remote Annunciator Board Electronic Parts Item Ref Drawing No PartName Description Part No None 11549 C0153 Circuit Board Remote Annunciator 2 11549001 J1 11549 C01 S3 Connector 15 Pin D Male COM R1315 J1 11549 01 53 Jackscrews 0 560 Long Screw COHD75 SW1 11549 01 53 Switch SW PB14 Button SW1 11549 C0153 Switch Cap Black SW HD6 None 11549 01 53 Spacer 0 25 x 4 Clearance SPRB4404 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 17 Options Printer Option 19 18 PCM 2 Technical M anual SK1 11549 01 53 Buzzer Piezoelectric ADSS6 Transducer 051 3 11549 01 53 LED Bar Red 6 x 29 mm OPLP55 052 11549 01 53 LED Bar Yellow 6 x 29 mm OPLP56 R1 4 5 11549 C0153 Resistor 220 Ohm 1 4W RECC221B22 R2 6 11549 C0153 Resistor 270 Ohm 1 4W RECC271B22 R3 11549 C0153 Resistor 150 Ohm 1 4W RECC151B22 T he remote annunciator accessory is designed for use with products that incorporate T hermo Electron computer boards in the SP24 series W hen connected to P6 of the computer board the following signals are used SP24 D Conn Signal P6 Pin 0101 Alarm LED drive active low 0209 LED drive
77. password should be used to examine current settings run response checks and examine status and test results Thermo Electron Corporation Accessing the Computer Main System Menu Thermo Electron Corporation Operation Computer Interface T his chapter contains detailed descriptions of the menus and parameters that may be accessed from thefront panel and the mechanics of viewing and changing them D etailed explanations of the significance and uses of these parameters are provided in C hapter 5 Edit The PCM 2 is controlled by a single board computer that performs all necessary calculations and also provides the graphical user interface T his computer may be accessed from either the front panel keypad or the full size keyboard stowed inside the instrument M ost functions are supported by the keypad T he keyboard should be used for instrument setup and testing because some operations require the use of keys not available on the front panel W hen any Escape key is pressed the system requests a password T he System supports low and high level passwords corresponding to thetwo available access modes the password entered determines which mode is selected D efault values for these passwords are 0000 and 9999 respectively T hese values may be changed to user selected four digit values however the defaults are reinstated if the PCM 2 s parameter files are re initialized to their default values T he currently active item
78. the values of the remaining n 1 data points Any value could be assigned to any of the n 1 points but the can only assume a single value determined by the first n 1 points hence zero degrees of freedom exist for the n data point 2 Technical M anual 13 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions Table A 3 Chi squared Distribution 0 005 0 010 0 025 0 050 0 100 0 250 0 500 0 750 0 900 0 950 0 975 0 990 0 995 1 0 000039 0 000157 0 000982 0 0039 0 0158 0 102 0 455 1 32 2 71 3 84 5 02 6 63 7 88 2 0 005013 0 0101 0 0253 0 051 0 105 0 288 0 693 1 39 2 30 3 00 3 69 4 61 5 30 3 0 0239 0 0383 0 0719 0 117 0 195 0 404 0 789 1 37 2 08 2 60 3 12 3 78 4 28 4 0 0517 0 0743 0 1211 0 178 0 266 0 481 0 839 1 35 1 94 2 37 2 79 3 32 3 72 5 0 0823 0 1109 0 1662 0 229 0 322 0 535 0 870 1 33 1 85 2 21 2 57 3 02 3 35 6 0 113 0 145 0 206 0 273 0 367 0 576 0 891 1 31 1 77 2 10 2 41 2 80 3 09 7 0 141 0 177 0 241 0 310 0 405 0 608 0 907 1 29 1 72 2 01 2 29 2 64 2 90 8 0 168 0 206 0 272 0 342 0 436 0 634 0 918 1 28 1 67 1 94 2 19 2 51 2 74 9 0 193 0 232 0 300 0 369 0 463 0 655 0 927 1 27 1 63 1 88 2 11 2 41 2 62 10 0 216 0 256 0 325 0 394 0 487 0 674 0 934 1 25 1 60 1 83 2 05 2 32 2 52 11 0 237 0 278 0 347 0 416 0 507 0 689 0 940 1 25 1 57 1 79 1 99 2 25 2 43 12 0 256 0 298 0 367 0 436 0 525 0 703 0 945 1 24 1 55 1 75 1 94 2 18 2 36 13 0 274 0 316 0 385 0 453 0 542 0 715 0 949 1 23 1 52 1 72 1 90 2 13 2 29 14
79. will be very low and air will diffuse in relatively quickly Flow rates must be adequate to maintain adequate working pressure and to prevent air from diffusing upstream from the gas outlet The PCM 2 Gas M anager System incorporates the following features to reduce the gas consumption rate of gas flow proportional detectors Detectors are plumbed in parallel so that each receives fresh counting gas directly from the source A flow restrictor is inserted in front of each detector to insure even distribution of gasto every chamber Chamber outlets are connected together and exhausted through a flow restrictor to maintain uniform gas pressure within all detectors A solenoid valveis used to bypassthis restrictor during initial high rate purging of the detectors Additional solenoid valves are used to meer gas into the intake manifold upstream of the flow restrictors as needed to maintain a constant working pressure T his pressure is measured at the outlet and is therefore representative of all detectors in the system T he overall gas consumption of such a system is determined by the pressure setting and the diameter of the outlet flow restrictor In addition enough gas must be supplied to compensate for leakage through detector faces and chamber seals Practical working pressures for typical detectors faced with thin M ylar amp range from approximately 0 05 to 0 50 of water Pressures above 0 5 may damage detector fac
80. 0 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC101B22 R8 R9 11534 C151 Resistor 1K Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC102B22 A2 11534 C151 7 Channel Buffer ICXX30 DS1 7 11534 C151 LED T 1 Red superbright OPLP57 1 11534 151 Resistor Array 9 x 4 7K Ohm REAR472B21 Al 11534 C151 Numeric display 2 digit green OPDS32 A3 11534 C151 Display Driver ICXX5480 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 14 1 Clock display board 11534 150 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Clock Display Board 0 Indcotas Cothede Side m 5 ue ay e a He 29 a raca 0 nn n n om 1 of T 10 delemine ahich anode stich m Catked goes to sore pad 051 057 MILLS 1 Enckrcled markers refer to ine numbers on QOM YP11534151 2 PJ is 6 currently implermerted hordwore is tolled there Figure 14 2 11534 151 Clock display board components A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 14 3 Clock Display Board BLANK PAGE 14 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation General Description Traffic Light Board Parts List Chapter 15 Traffic Light Board T hetraffic light board consists of six series LED lights 3 red and 3 green and six limiting resistor pairs which are controlled by the PCM 2 front panel
81. 00 FACTOR 50 0 WEI FACTOR 10 0 SHIELD FACTOR 1 00 Calculated Val ues Calculated Values BACKGROUND CPS 0 00 BACKGROUND CPS 0 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 RDA LOWER LIMIT DPS 1 00 RDA LOWER LIMIT DPS 1 00 COUNT TI ME SEC 1 00 COUNT TI ME SEC 1 00 T he detector voltage may be adjusted in steps of approximately 10 V not to exceed 1750 when using P 10 counting gas Background count rates are multiplied by this factor before being used to test for detector sensitivity T his converts the detector s average background count rates into count rate per unit area in order to compensate for difference in detector size It is used only for channel sensitivity test calculations All detector sizes are referenced to one third of a full size triple detector As an example the default geometry factor for channel 0 is always 1 0 D etectors marked as inactive are not used in any computations T hisisdone to keep the instrument operating if one detector fails Particles that cause the detector to produce a pulse exceeding this relative amplitude are counted as alpha particles Lower amplitude pulses register as betas T he default alpha threshold of 4596 is seldom changed Particles that produce pulses below this relative amplitude are counted as either alpha or beta T he default beta threshold of 596 is seldom changed Thermo Electron Corporation Alpha amp Beta Effic
82. 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 ALARM LEVEL NCPS 1 00 COUNT TIME SEC 1 00 COUNT TIME SEC 1 00 PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 11 Edit Detector Parameters 5 12 Alpha amp Beta Sensitivities RDA Confidence Max Count Time Sigma Factor Background Sigma Factor Alpha amp Beta Sum Zone Alarm Alpha amp Beta Sum Channel Alarm PCM 2 Technical M anual A ratio above and below the mean of background counts beyond which a single detector s background is determined to be indicative of a detector failure T he default value is 0 5 meaning that a detector with more than twice or less than half as many counts as the system average is considered suspect N ote that because the size location and orientation of a detector affects its background counts each detector has a geometry factor that is used to compensate for these variables The probability of detecting contamination of the specified RD A Possible values are 5096 7596 9096 9596 9996 and 99 996 See Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological easurements The longest acceptable count time which the PC M 2 may use for measurements If increases in background levels require a measurement time exceeding this value a high background alarm condition occurs A multiplier of the average background count rate standard deviation that influences the false alarm rate See Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological M easurements If a back
83. 000 04 utput bit 3 A000 05 N C 06 Input bit 4 A003 07 Input bit 3 A003 08 Input bit 2 A003 09 Ground 10 45V 11 12 T raffic light 1 red T raffic light 1 green Traffic light 2 red T raffic light 2 green Power to traffic lights Remote status annunciator port Thermo Electron Corporation Front Panel Board Circuit Description Connector P7 Gas source control and access control option Pinout 01 Output bit 4 o A000 02 Output bit 5 A000 03 Output bit 6 A000 04 O utput bit 7 o A000 05 O utput bit 6 A001 06 O utput bit 7 A001 07 Input bit 1 9 A003 08 Input bit 0 o A003 09 Ground 10 45 Volts 114V 124V Connector P8 Body position sensors Pinout 01 Ground 02 Ground 03 Input bit 7 A001 04 Input bit 6 A001 05 Input bit 5 001 06 Input bit 4 A001 Connector P9 Body position sensors Pinout 01 Ground 02 Ground 03 Input bit 0 A001 04 Input bit 1 9 A001 05 Input bit 2 A001 06 Input bit 3 A001 Thermo Electron Corporation Gas source solenoid valve relay Access control exit unlock Access control entrance lock Access control aux output Gas pressure 1 sense drive Gas pressure 2 sense drive Gas pressure sense input Access control doors open input Ground to access control switch Power to gas solenoid relay Power to access control Platform weight sensor switch Left foot position switch Right foot position switch H and position switch H ip position switch PC
84. 001553 ddn eps ye aps um spes Wb 40 13280492 poog 94 uo wd oj seob qoo 24 uo BAM URI 941 Zd pipog sung Wwy uoqpoo paaga lt usojb peo umous 607 POY 050 wey nsu 6 566 1147 spun wocis 4909 zii wm yeld peo 1010 woy cj pO izgl anca WOR vo sway auy ci aja Z ZN2d W O H we eus sajas qune papi ug i SION 89 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL 39Vd ANV14 Upper Electronica Enclosure Assembly ate Cord eee note 5 Power Supply 88e rale 154 Gore WEARI Ad Cable pm Sca cord n 5 g 9 ON WRACZO AC Extenaien HDM 132 i HDTA25 sec mote 5 SCHMIODS Nut 50170008 Lockwasher 22711534251 Bracket 54 3 VEMIBSA Interface hd d TEES i aig d H TERREI Hj LE h HER HEF si hdi TIERE 22 69 PCM 2 Technical M anual Ceiling Assembly 11534 0315 rof per Figure 22 62 11534 706 Computer Identics swipe card reader assembly Thermo Electron Corporation 00 enue W 16514291 Z 24 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L
85. 0123130 Pi opas PSSS 1 Lado i NEL pene mmu o pute SNC LS i poog 494219 4 um sam mom mcm puopubis amp AON ry p ee be i i 21140 i SW L l M M a uwous uondg snoun J j ZWOd WO Z ewey 10 JO JISYB ZWOd ZWOd O J9jeH T3Nvd 14093 M31PidAOD NIWA pA r mien Maid viU Feel Viii uiu M 4 i 81140 E ssl 01140 sng i JH i Mog sayndwiog mot 5140 qu CL EMO Mo Wod J0 biounuuy 7 puo eec LM ONDA 10123195 505 2 usus snsesig 800 U2yMS 2758944 509 ams 1904 H ec pas 3003 7 434 yaban 3 21180 UMS i ITSE EU ums puoH 9ubg 14024 SINO 129 yawns d Od Poog abus adis yw MOOC ZGNHA 0195 LeZv SLLdA 42913 201 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 6 cc W je91u429 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 oway seq quia
86. 10 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Detectors Maintenance 1 numbers refer to line Rem numbers on BOM 15234062 7 par 11000 PCM 2 Detector Asseritly Procedure X Test ha compited Proba per 1042 4879 PCM 2 Detector Voltage ond Look Test Procedum Figure 16 6 11534 562 Revised detector assembly small drawing 2 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 11 Detectors Maintenance BLANK PAGE 16 12 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 77 Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Thisoption isa 2 GB or larger hard disk drive for the PCM 2 instrument It mounts the lower electronics enclosure adjacent to the power supply mounting bracket Addition of this option significantly enlarges the PCM 2 s data storage capabilities for transaction files calibration reports status log files source check routine results etc It also significantly enhances the unit s overall speed with respect to instrument startup calibration and troubleshooting Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 17 1 Hard Disk Drive NOTES 1 Ercirded rurnbers refer to line Ram mamberg 8 0 M PCM2 011 Lower Electronics Enclosure Assembly View Figure 17 1 11534 563 Hard disk drive assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chap
87. 1342DE uD Dzllqp 5 Y rax 9509 2 mew us 4 12 2 amp dog amp PUD 199 ncotus uj penaas 290 asp 305 ei Buros ver 49415 sag pauspea puo 64 6 9d 055 0190 836 ab Gld 52129 e ole TER By gg 29 00 4 o3 puc 12 20 8 bunds BRIOH 895 20 6469954945 D suntu Nox31 RI E zez 25 6C2 enue W 165104291 Z 102104105 uo1pe 3 oway L TLE vESTI 48 0 nfd ww po xd RD neis poen Mo AMO VEL juan eg J FH APPS 1947 Y m pod 0 Jit ee AOR aba A01 OH 08 eme f Wo we L 1 af p 8 J 41 E JE tE 481 A E att val __ 8 E BS ps qux Py UPD YOU ob sou yama RUEDAS is a0 PUD 600 g ym 20102 am 2 uang 52 a50 qog 2504 Dupgdn i Xorb 2704 wong W Cus buat Lal joy m u ang 5 PUIG go iue DUM pasti Pus RA Peu uses 10901 E 329 9401820 fatexocec ac Pua SIGN Ip zx MW O 8
88. 1534 D477 Bearing Support Lower 2 11534430 080 11534 08478 Cable Assembly AC Power YP11534469 090 11534 D478 Cable Assembly Gate Position Switch YP11534470 130 11534 D478 Cable Assembly Relays YP11534481 N A 11534 D478 Cable Assembly PCM 2 Interface YP11534472 170 11534 D478 Bearing Support Upper ZP11534429 210 11534 D478 Switch Mounting Bracket Exit Gate ZP11534458 220 11534 D478 Switch Mounting Bracket Entry Gate 2X11534458 230 11534 D478 Mounting Bracket Gas Spring amp Dashpot 2 11534457 310 11534 D478 Flanged Bearing Upper Gate Shaft MM B616 322 11534 40478 Hole Plug Entry Gate Shaft MM BZ27 340 11534 D478 Rubber Grommet 1 id x 13 4 od x 3 32 MMRU99 390 11534 D478 Rubber Bumper Gate Stop M M RU6 410 11534 D478 Power Supply 12v 1 3 a M EVE168 420 11534 D478 Terminal Strip COTB41 430 11534 D478 Marker Strip COHD39 470 11534 D478 Relay Remote Gate Unlock RLGP13 480 11534 D478 Relay Socket Remote Gate Unlock RLSO3 490 11534 0478 Relay 12v Time Delay RLTD01 500 11534 D478 Relay Socket 12v Time Delay RLSO15 510 11534 D478 Cable Clamp 1 4 diameter CL62 100 11534 D479 Cable Assembly M agnetic Lock YP11534471 N A 11534 D479 Magnetic Lock and Strike Entry and Exit Gates M EVE183 Plate 120 11534 D479 Cable Assembly Emergency Exit Switch 11534475 N A 11534 D479 Sensing Edge Switch Emergency Exit SWMI61 250 11534 D479 Mounting Plate Gate Handle ZP11534465 260 11534 D479 Mounting Plate Emergency Exit Switch 2 11534466 330 11534 D47
89. 2 402 i a in a CH 344 297 y ain fy CH CPS 230 172 115 57 By in a CH 1200 Volts 1900 Volts 1450 Alpha CPS 397 Beta CPS 353 Alpha as Beta CPS 153 Beta as Alpha CPS 0 35 ESC Exit F2 Set HU F3 Data Table F7 Print Next PoUp Prev Figure 7 1 Typical source plateau curves A larger version of this graph is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 7 5 Calibration Efficiencies 2270 BACKGROUND PLATEAU DETECTOR 2 athreshlod 45mV 24 3 8 threshold 5mV in By CH 21 6 18 9 16 2 13 5 CPS 10 8 Bet a in a CH 0 a n 1200 Volts 1900 Volts 1450 Alpha CPS 0 15 Beta CPS 10 2 ESC Exit F2 Set HU F3 Data Table F7 Print PgDn Next PgUp Pri Figure 7 2 Typical background plateau curves A larger version of this graph is located in Chapter 22 Efficiencies Detector efficiencies are determined by measuring calibrated sources and then dividing the measured count rates by the known activities of the sources W hen the efficiency calculation function is selected the user is asked to enter activities for one alpha and one beta source and then select a detector and to calibrate T he selected detector will acquire counts in the specified channel for the count time selected W hen the count cycleis com
90. 220 11534D236 1 8 ID Tubing Clear PVC MMTUI Thermo Electron Corporation _ 5684 io 232 Thermo Electron Corporation he fos Sop Lire muting hole 200 28 m TON tubing IT qm Cplingers Da 409 soared yo wot wih aed Sees 1283 cx Front ew Side View Options Optional Features Empty 30 13 Lmxied eei two fel bote PIO 7 BD 156 1 j MBs 95 how 2 pisces Figure 19 27 11534 564 Gas bottle enclosure outline A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 55 Options Optional Features mits 1 fe ambos e ROM Ole Merkin daw DR aN Puis ae Pode cu wen rile to en O10 freba of beton wis o pend y ene a dry ml ob ache ris bilem Dasseni tte scu gabe Von fe doon phis Te bate pete om ide Hak al the dT ane t st Ca abbe mei to baion picie hin lbe masuc smo move ob ahg Ye Oe mare AN tayiya at hema 308 Breckels sto iwe DA E Pred iba retertion sirpa fri aerae ropa te for hal 115 Petes Qum e 15536 0949 Meg atudrovi col ee ee Ges ei aha open pom of quem Provi tops cet n pets shipment f i
91. 4 o LR RET 2 4 uick Start Instructions seee s 2 5 Operation 3 1 N O peration 3 1 Computer Interface a 3 2 VOW 4 1 M easurement Results eene 4 1 Transaction Report 4 1 Background Averages 4 1 4 1 Detector Performance 4 2 and Probe ReadindS ss 4 2 Gross Count 4 2 A 5 1 Preet All T n 5 1 Fixed Count Time cud doct 5 6 Detector 1 5 MNT 5 8 Count T ime M 5 10 Detector Parame Sisinnius 5 11 H and Probe lt 5 14 Channel O verride 5 15 Instrument Configuration Parameters 5 16 D ay File 000 0 OT 5 19 RadN gt Parameters 5 20 Sum Zone Se amp tUp Ps 5 21 PCM 2 Technical M anual Contents Chapter Statis 6 1 Overall M onitor 6 1 Detector Stat S eain bed S BR Saa 6 1 M 6 2 Chapter 7 Calibration sssi 7 1
92. 4 Eff To solve Equation 44 asit is presented requires several iterative steps Virtually any starting value for RD can be placed in the right hand side W hen the equation is solved it returns a new valuefor RDA which is reentered in the right hand side T he process repeats until no change in RDA occurs A closed form solution is indicated by Equation 45 T he former method is usually preferred 2 4 SF RT 5 SF Rpt T Eq 45 RDA Eff 3 Minimum Type II False Alarms A false alarm is defined as an alarm produced by activity in addition to background that is below RDA Illustrated in Figure A 9 isthe distribution of probabilities for varying activity levels under two different count times all other parameters being held constant In both instances the 90 confidence level exists for the selected RDA of 110 Also in both cases diminishing probabilities of an alarm occurring are associated with diminishing levels of activity H owever the longer count time causes the performance of the instrument to more closely approximate the Step Function that an ideal instrument would exhibit wherein zero probability of an alarm exists below RDA 110 and a probability of 1 00 exists above A 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Summary Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Summary that value W hat is suggested by Figure A 9 isthat T ypell
93. 4 313 Voice annunciator assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Printer Option Printer ThePCM 2 Printer O ption enables the user to quickly and easily generate hard copy of various measurement and calibration data such as calibration reports transaction files status log reports and source check routines T his option consists of a 9 dot matrix RS 232C compatible printer and technical manual T he printer sits on a special shelf that is mounted to the side door on the right hand side of the instrument as you face the PCM 2 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 15 Options Printer Option The PCM 2 interfaces with the printer via parallel port on the PC The printer cableis routed internally out of the electronics enclosure through the cabinet and externally through a strain relief at the lower right hand side and rear of the instrument Refer to the printer stechnical manual for printer mode select switch settings and other configuration information NOTES 1 Encircied number refer to Ine items on ALOM OPTS 2 Number in squore refer to lie item on BO M 3 Noted items ore to be sepcrctely for shippmem with but nat assemhied the PCM 2 unit Figure 19 6 1534 312 Printer assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 16 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options
94. 5 A103 11451 C02 LC Voltage regulator 5V ICAVA2950C Cl 11451 C02 Capacitor 0 047 uF 50V 2096 CPCE473P4N C2 11451 C02 Capacitor 33 yF 10V 10 CPXX12 C3 11451 C02 Capacitor 100 pF 500V 5 CPM I101P3X 11451 C02 Capacitor 0 015 2 5 33V CPPF153P1K C5 11451 C02 Capacitor 0 1 uF 50V 10 CPCE104P3N CR1 4 11451 C02 d c 65 GT 1 2 11451 C02 Spark VETU2 1 11451 C02 Connector 2 pin 0 156 COM R1502 2 11451 C02 Connector 9 pin 0 100 COM 809 3 11451 C02 Connector 12 pin 0 100 COMR112 R1 11451 02 Resistor 27K 1 4W 5 RECC273B22 R2 3 8 9 11 11451 C02 Resistor 48 7K 1 4W 1 RECE483B12 R4 11451 C02 Resistor 200K 1 4W 1 RECE204B12 Thermo Electron Corporation Ref Desig R5 R6 R7 R10 R12 13 R14 SW1 4 Thermo Electron Corporation Drawing No PartName Description Part No 11451 C02 Resistor 100K 1 4W 1 RECE104B12 11451 C02 Resistor 51 1K 1 4W 1 RECE513B12 11451 C02 Resistor 24 9K 1 4W 1 RECE253B12 11451 C02 Resistor 249K 1 4W 1 RECE244B12 11451 C02 Resistor 4 5 REW W 040816 11451 C02 Resistor 100 5 REW W 101816 11451 C02 Switch DIP SPST 4 position SW M147 Sama z RO 4102 1 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface RS 232 to RS 485 Interface Parts List tx 8 n ears H T 1 Qi VON t U PORPO R M c 1 Tat 4 E 4 1 CRI UN an T1 Figure 12 1 11451 003 RS 232 to R
95. 513 002 Voice annunciator 1 of 2 Thermo Electron Corporation 05 22 W 2214291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Z Jo Z NOK 1 310A 200 ETSTT rp zz en61 T lt er giy zz 05 TX 18 Te cC W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Ajquasse joyeipunuue 3210A CTE pPEGTT Sp cz aunbi4 ZL 2025 Cuges yod RUD BADA y mm m oj g ST O O 10 mi pabien ROS wo Wai wil C i69 PHJ 1 i MED 4 Md 120 7511 Jad Aaway giao ad n jawar Pug 75 2 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL f quiasse TE PEGTT 97 22 10 811 Jad doop poo 022 YUN z W2d 941 oo jou yng yum yuowuddiys Ajsjosodes aq aso f W O g uo wey auy Joos ajonbs Joquunw Z ELJO 2999 NOB YO sway oun oj Jazas Jequrnu SIW 6 cC enue W 6214291 Z Wd Ajqwasse jojeipunuue ezG vEGTT Lp cc Pe quusssp 9 BJj 0 yams uojnqusnd 3p q oj uonisod peog I d NPY Z 8S1d0 cWOd Pun PREOSSLI dA HOA uo sjequnu
96. 6 3 Hard Disk 17 1 Swivellng Casters unsausdaricrnrdir oria ci dan 18 1 DBOHS nior ra i Era Sr aen dcn QU RUE 19 1 and Probe O ption eie aciei eoe doces 19 1 H and Probe Clicker BOSE santet Rete e ebat ve dmt 19 3 Voice ADU SEO vto re Posee terea ica 19 6 Sound Card Voice Annunciato ooa er c 19 7 Printer O DU OT aeos pene 19 14 Wall M ount Remote amp 19 20 Aces EP ED vee EP 19 23 Optional Fea bes eem b napa 19 26 PCM 2 Technical M anual V Contents vi PCM 2 Technical M anual Chapter 20 Standard Parts List 20 1 Chapter 21 Recommended Spare Parts sssri 21 1 Chapter 22 UGS ink ain rag 22 1 Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements A 1 Teas tec a oahu o Cu A 1 Basic M easurement A 1 Distribution FUNCTION 5 S MMAY 23 Appendbx 1 General Ne Ce 1 Required Equipment sss B 1 2 Background C NECKS saas coectetuer tee ER qe ecd epa ode B 3 Source Pla eas noce ue dett ttd bd dct B 3 Statistical Variance T
97. 65825 0 9221962 0 9357445 0 9473839 0 9572838 0 9656205 0 9725711 0 9783083 0 9829970 0 9867906 0 9898296 0 9922397 0 9941323 0 9956035 0 9967359 0 9975988 0 9982498 0 9987361 0 9990957 0 9993590 0 9995499 0 9996869 0 9997842 0 9998527 0 9999004 0 9999333 0 9999557 0 9999709 0 9999811 0 9999878 0 9999922 0 9999951 0 9999969 0 9999981 0 9999988 0 9999993 0 9999996 0 9999997 0 03 0 5119665 0 5517168 0 5909541 0 6293000 0 6664022 0 7019440 0 7356527 0 7673049 0 7967306 0 8238145 0 8484950 0 8707619 0 8906514 0 9082409 0 9236415 0 9369916 0 9484493 0 9581849 0 9663750 0 9731966 0 9788217 0 9834142 0 9871263 0 9900969 0 9924506 0 9942969 0 9957308 0 9968333 0 9976726 0 9983052 0 9987772 0 9991260 0 9993810 0 9995658 0 9996982 0 9997922 0 9998583 0 9999043 0 9999359 0 9999575 0 9999721 0 9999819 0 9999883 0 9999925 0 9999953 0 9999971 0 9999982 0 9999989 0 9999993 0 9999996 0 9999998 0 04 0 5159534 0 5556700 0 5948349 0 6330717 0 6700314 0 7054015 0 7389137 0 7703500 0 7995458 0 8263912 0 8508300 0 8728568 0 8925123 0 9098773 0 9250663 0 9382198 0 9494974 0 9590705 0 9671159 0 9738102 0 9793248 0 9838226 0 9874545 0 9903581 0 9926564 0 9944574 0 9958547 0 9969280 0 9977443 0 9983589 0 9988171 0 9991553 0 9994024 0 9995811 0 9997091 0 9997999 0 9998637 0 9999080 0 9999385 0 9999593 0 9999733 0 9999826 0 9999888 0 9999929 0 9999955 0 9999972 0 9
98. 81 3 11526 003 Resistor 8 2K 1 4W 5 RECC822B22 RP1 5 11526 D03 Resistor 4 x IK SIP Network REAR102B21 RP3 6 11526 D03 Resistor 9 x 10K SIP Network REAR103B21 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Front Panel Board Host Communications Port Configuration 51 8 11526 011 DIP Switch 8 Position SWMI5 S9 11526 D03 Push Button PC Mount SW PB27 Switch X1 11526 003 Crystal 11 0592 M Hz CYOS18 XXA5 6 7 11526 003 Socket 28 Pin Smart with ICXX27 11526 D11 battery XXA8 11526 D03 Socket 28 Pin Smart with ICXX26 battery and clock Item is specific to the PCM 2 board configuration Either A27 or A29 may be used see Serial Ports on page 11 2 Thermo Electron Corporation Figure 11 1 11526 003 Front panel board SP24 basic component assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 11 Front Panel Board Host Communications Port Configuration 1 mdrrim mriw wir te BOM 1711526009 2 1 mouet sockets When only gre ahoan AQUA LL meurt in Be at the time 3 Mis is end pacs of diley isan tape oder io secum the Dust in the Hogan refer to he agnam ROU PIN Pe ps e He P Hei MOUNTED OM BACKSIDE ne Eus gt Us
99. 9 Holder Channel Sensing Edge 1170 332 11534 D479 Panel Grommet Rubber M M RU56 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 29 Options Optional Features 370 11534 D479 Handle Gates HDHA24 100 11534 D480 Cable Assembly M agnetic Lock YP11534471 132 11534 D480 Modified Rod End Dashpot YP11534605 140 11534 D480 Retaining Plate Base 2 11534436 150 11534 D480 Retaining Plate Ceiling YP11534437 190 11534 D480 Stop Arm Bell Crank Gates 2 11534431 200 11534 D480 Upper Gate Shafts ZP11534444 240 11534 D480 Lock Housing Exit Gate ZP11534459 332 11534 D480 Panel Grommet Rubber M M RU56 350 11534 D480 Knurled Thumb Screw 10 32 x 3 4 long x 3 4 SCTS17 diam 380 11534 D480 Panel Grommet Rubber M M RU6 392 11534 D480 Air Dashpot Gate Return Dampening 1172 400 11534 D480 Compression Spring Gates Return 1165 520 11534 D480 Flexible Conduit Wire routing MMTU41 730 11534 D480 Set Screw 1 4 20 x 1 4 long 56552504 19 30 2 Technical M anual Figure 19 12 Access control base assembly 11534 477 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Figure 19 13 11534 478 Access control ceiling assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 31 Options Optional Features
100. 999 T he old and new zero values will be displayed and the new value will be stored in nonvolatile memory Reconnect the exhaust hose and return the instrument to service M ake sure to readjust the operating pressure any time the pressure sensor zero has been set Thermo Electron Corporation Gas Manager Board Parts List Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features T able 19 19 lists the items incorporated in the gas manager board and contains parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 19 Gas M anager Board Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description PartNo Al 11582 D04 IC M icroprocessor ICCM AC51FA A2 11582 D04 LC Octal Buffer ICHCA 74373 A3 11582 D04 32K x 8 EPROM Consult programmed Thermo Electron A4 11582 4 LC 32K x 8 RAM Static ICCM 43C256 CM 05 A5 11582 D04 LLC 3 to 8 Line Decoder ICCM AHC138 11582 004 LLC 2 Channel 10 Bit A D ICCM 1091 Converter Al 11582 D04 Encoder Switch Rotary Shaft SW 150 8 11582 4 LLC Serial EEPROM 1K bit ICCM A93C46 CM 05 A9 11582 D04 Transducer 0 5 H20 Pressure M TFM 36 A10 11582 D04 LLC RS 485 Transceiver ICCM A485 Al2 11582 D04 LLC Octal D Flip Flop ICHCA 74374 A13 11582 D04 LC 7 Channel Power Buffer 1 0 Al4 11582 D04 LLC 5 V Regulator ICAV7805 15 11582 004 LC Hex Schmidt Trigger ICHCA14 A16 11582 D04 LC 8 V Reg
101. 999983 0 9999989 0 9999994 0 9999996 0 9999998 0 05 0 06 0 5199388 0 5239222 0 5596177 0 5635595 0 5987063 0 6025681 0 6368307 0 6405764 0 6736448 0 6772419 0 7088403 0 7122603 0 7421539 0 7453731 0 7733726 0 7763727 0 8023375 0 8051055 0 8289439 0 8314724 0 8531409 0 8554277 0 8749281 0 8769756 0 8943502 0 8961653 0 9114920 0 9130850 0 9264707 0 9278550 0 9394292 0 9406201 0 9505285 0 9515428 0 9599408 0 9607961 0 9678432 0 9685572 0 9744119 0 9750021 0 9798178 0 9803007 0 9842224 0 9846137 0 9877755 0 9880894 0 9906133 0 9908625 0 9928572 0 9930531 0 9946139 0 9947664 0 9959754 0 9960930 0 9970202 0 9971099 0 9978140 0 9978818 0 9984111 0 9984618 0 9988558 0 9988933 0 9991836 0 9992112 0 9994230 0 9994429 0 9995959 0 9996103 0 9997197 0 9997299 0 9998074 0 9998146 0 9998689 0 9998739 0 9999116 0 9999150 0 9999409 0 9999433 0 9999609 0 9999625 0 9999744 0 9999755 0 9999834 0 9999841 0 9999893 0 9999898 0 9999932 0 9999935 0 9999957 0 9999959 0 9999973 0 9999974 0 9999983 0 9999984 0 9999990 0 9999990 0 9999994 0 9999994 0 9999996 0 9999996 0 9999998 0 9999998 0 07 0 5279032 0 5674949 0 6064199 0 6443088 0 6808225 0 7156612 0 7485711 0 7793501 0 8078498 0 8339768 0 8576903 0 8789995 0 8979577 0 9146565 0 9292191 0 9417924 0 9525403 0 9616364 0 9692581 0 9755808 0 9807738 0 9849966 0 9883962 0 9911060 0 9932443 0 9949151 0 9962074 0 9971972 0 9979476 0 9985110 0 9989297 0 9992378 0
102. A RDA confidence level sigma factor etc Alpha amp Beta Count Time The count times calculated for the alpha and beta channels of this detector given the current RD A RD A confidence level sigma factor and background count rates If the hand probe option is installed this screen may be used to set its high voltage alpha and beta thresholds and alpha and beta alarm set points An alarm set point may be entered for both the alpha and beta channels T his set point is expressed in the count rate units selected for the PCM 2 counts per second cps or counts per minute cpm In addition a weighing factor and a background sigma factor may be entered for both the alpha and beta channels T hese parameters are used in a smoothing algorithm that has been incorporated for the hand probe readings to allow the user to control the response time and the step change for the hand probe readings Thermo Electron Corporation Channel Override Parameters Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Channel Override Parameters Hand Probe Parameters HIGH VOLTAGE VOLTS 1550 Alpha Channel Beta Channel THRESHOLD MAX 45 THRESHOLD 5 ALARM SET POINT NCPS 61 6 ALARM SET POINT NCPS 9 50 Measured Value Measured Value BACKGROUND CPS 0 032 BACKGROUND CPS 6 19 Values for detector parameters may be entered from the override screen as an alternative to editing individual detectors Entries made here will be written to
103. CKGROUND SI GMA FACTOR 4 00 ALPHA SUM ZONE ALARM DPS 23 3 BETA SUM ZONE ALARM DPS 117 ALPHA SUM CH ALARM DPS 83 3 BETA SUM CH ALARM DPS 500 Calculated Values ALPHA RDA LOWER LIMIT DPS 2 56 BETA RDA LOWER LIMIT DPS 17 9 FALSE ALARM RATE 0 19 MIN COUNT TIME SEC 0 62 These the RD As reliably detectable activities used to compute alarm set points for the alpha and beta channels V alues entered are copied to all alpha and beta detector channels individual channel RD As may later be changed in the D etector Parameters screen A ratio above and below the mean of background counts beyond which a single detector s background is determined to be indicative of a detector failure T he default valueis 0 5 for the beta channels meaning that a detector with more than twice less than half as many counts as the system average is considered suspect Note Because the size location and orientation of a detector affect its background counts each detector has a geometry factor that is used to compensate for these variables D ueto the inherently lower background count rates the default alpha sensitivity factor is 0 10 allowing an acceptable range in count rates from 0 1 to 10 timesthe average A The probability of detecting contamination of the specified RD A Possible values are 5096 75 90 95 99 and 99 996 See Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological M easurements for a detailed d
104. Corporation Shield Factors Selecting Parameters Response Check Tuning the PCM 2 Thermo Electron Corporation Installation Quick Start Instructions Enter the activities of the sources to be used T heinstrument will correct for source decay if given an initial calibration date and the isotope half life Follow theinstructions displayed to select a detector position the source on that detector and begin the count After you have a satisfactory efficiency measurement store that value and move the source to the next detector After all detectors are calibrated with one source alpha or beta repeat the procedure with the other after selecting the correct channel type In this procedure background rates are measured first for all detectors with the instrument unoccupied and then with a person in measurement position T heratios obtained are used to correct for background shielding effects when a user isin position Follow the instructions displayed count times of at least 100 seconds are recommended to obtain accurate data at normal background levels Edit the Instrument Parameters screen to specify the desired counting mode Preset All Fixed T ime or M ax Sensitivity Select other appropriate settings on this screen such as Enabling D isabling Radon Compensation or Alpha Sum Zone Alarms RDA levels count times etc may be entered through the System Parameters screen All changes made will be saved on the instr
105. ESTT 68 22 N INEO SHUI MON 9215 Ye aps opis WR Ld ouod pay paaga popo puo agog 020 6 GBZYESL Laz Japun zii pasnun Sununew 2apoew paag 010 Bese 0 tubapuou eid 211 woy moway QWOd sway oj jajaj savonds euoquinw Z VLO us Suey sug jj pagouj TION 99 2 W 2521 4291 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy quiasse JapeaJ pled dIMS 2 pZE PESTT 09 22 4 ars Addn PE ouau op ui CL tee e o ese eel FOL ees g appa gy vanoa 010 eq dow puo quem pam jou m pod eye uwojs Boece n yya d 050 y 24 Wc WU p Gee UE CERT 3 2 cham esie wor mn ma Be aan cem APURO qq WARD P Ire Wis eum C iM Bauen WOR auar um Ge T TO AO LO bury 01 bdpa SIIN L9 CC W je91u429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Ajquiasse Japead pled 319501 091 SZE PESTI 19 02 N KjquuseSy 83
106. Electron Corporation Detector Assembly Thermo Electron Corporation Parts List Detectors Maintenance Appendix D PCM 2 Revised D etector Assembly Procedure defines the detailed process steps for the complete assembly manufacture of the revised design detectors Appendix E PCM 2 D etector H igh V oltage and Leak T est Procedure defines those processes required to properly test the probes when assembled T his procedure appears in Appendix B Procedures and supplements detector assembly drawings 11534 560 see Fig 16 1 Fig 22 14 11534 561 see Fig 22 16 and 11534 562 see Fig 22 18 for the revised probes T able 16 2 liststhe electronic items incorporated in the detector and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 16 2 Detector Assembly Parts List Item Ref No Drawing Ref Part Name Description P N 030 Turret post Teflon ZP11534557 035 Turret spindle Brass ZP11534556 040 Turret cap Teflon ZP11534558 045 Wire spring Anode wire ZP11534559 050 Insulator washer Outer ZP11534165 060 Insulator washer Inner ZP11534360 070 Banana plug Uninsulated 113 080 Flat washer Stainless steel SCM W 50 110 11534 562 Copper tape Conductive double sticky HDTA83 140 Teflon coated wire 22AWG WRTF99922 150 1 8 quick coupling M odified ZP11534346 160 Ring clip Probe chamber ZP11534030 170 Aluminized M ylar amp 0 0025 thick MMM
107. Equation 40 should be used instead of Equation 41 In Equation 41 theS B subscript is dropped since the need to differentiate between two counting intervals goes away Eq 41 x Eff Rp ge If an alarm set point is made equal to Rs there would be a 50 likelihood that R D A would cause alarm since Rs is its associated average count rate Being an average it is expected to exceed its average half of the and be less than that value the remaining half of the time By inspecting Figure A 8 the reader can envision that for significant gt gt 0 50 probabilities of detection the alarm setpoint must be lower than Rs In a manner analogous to selecting R aqm jy a maximum permissible alarm set point is expressed in terms of Fs T he multiplier of Fs is called z in this document T he desired probability of detection also called C onfidence Led determines the value of z which is selected from T able A 2 A 90 confidence level probability of RD A producing an alarm is accomplished with 2 21 28 and a 9596 confidence level results from z 1 65 2 Technical M anual A 19 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions A 20 Optimization 2 Technical M anual RDA x eff Z 7 HUI Ai ill L R RDA x eff Figure A 8 Applying RDA in setting up a counting exercise
108. Figure 19 11 Time delay relay switch settings A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Optional Features Remote Alarm Annunciator Local Alarm Beacon Remote Pull Station Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features T hefollowing three optional features may be added to the PCM 2 access control unit T his option consists of a small remote module which visually displays a red light and emits an audible toneto communicate alarms for either an unauthorized exit from or an emergency exit gate lock override condition at an access control equipped PCM 2 unit T heremote alarm modulefeatures push button Alarm Acknowledge switch to manually interrupt the audible alarm tone and visual alarm light T he typical application for this remote alarm annunciator module is for installation in a guard station where remote monitoring of personnel egress from a single PCM 2 or from multiple PCM 2s is desirable T his option includes the interconnecting cable CA 109 XXFT XX denotes cable length in feet T he length of this cable up to a 200 ft maximum must be specified by the user when ordering this option T he remote alarm modules can simply set upright on any horizontal surface or up to four modules can be wall mounted with the use of an optional wall mounting fixture see W all ount Remote Annunciator on page 19 21 T his accessory is simply a red strobe light which illu
109. Figure 19 18 11534 476 Access control overall wiring larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 7A ICI Insert Cart Reader T he barcode reader provides a convenient means of entering a ser ID number T his card reader is an insert reader in that it requires the user to insert a card with a bar code on it into the card guide T he barcode reader will read bar codes over the speed range of 3 30 inches per second ips at the recommended density of the encoded bar A nonread isindicated by illuminating both the red and green LED s A good read isindicated by illuminating the green LED only T he reader is mounted in the lower cutout in the console panel s display panel beneath the CRT Thereader is capable of reading either visible bar codes or bar codes hidden behind a special black filter T hereader is optimized to read bar codes whose narrow bar is greater than 0 013 inch H owever bar codes with a narrow bar width of 0 010 can be read with some slight deterioration of the high Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features speed scanning rate T he recommended distance from the edge of the card to the center of the bar code strip is 3 8 0 375 T he recommended width of the bar code strip is 1 2 0 50 ThelCI bar code reader is a low cost unit capable of reading only the codes shown in T able 19 10 Table 19 10 Codes Readable by ICI Bar Code Reader Code Type Recommended Density
110. Lyd Svgad papja puo Bugunoyw 129225 05 1 papy aay iuo gwassy amp 010910 49925 1004 eonjdeu cj 9945 dA apay SION wl 91058 401301035 Aquas payadusoy eio FOY ZOLINOH umbus jeu sod 2 due dayi 42 24 542455 46040573595 222085 9 5 gei TONGA 0 499 25 JOLY Pepo SWAPO uonbioisu 003 seas Adeo 27 sts S0raHas SaaS adh LPOSHASIS 76 2 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL C6NI3A Jo GEL PESTT 98 22 6 It 1024 Me Ip PN Gua ds bd 2 05302 FOS TUROT E622 W 2514291 Z WOd u01 e10d109 uoJ9 3 Owy Jd ajqeo Ja MOd ObL PESTI S8 ZZ einig E 8 1 034 SS ESA 5 lt RAHAA eS COO0DOSHA IB Em TZOUKISNM LEY reds d amp un pup dui ig 0 god WZ NGA Said vOtccHNOS SS tres 1d1 uwos uo AH IESELEN O 2995 1 TIEN 06 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy euipno eunsopue 1304 seo poc pesTT 98 22 4 A maA 1452 ag U g
111. M 2 Technical M anual 11 7 Front Panel Board Circuit Description 11 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Connector P10 Front panel keypad Pinout Connector P11 Spare keypad inputs Pinout Connector P12 Clock display power and data Pinout 01 Row 6 drive 02 Column 5 sense 03 Column 4 sense 04 Row 4 drive 05 Column 3 sense 06 Column 2 sense 07 Column 1 sense 08 Row 5 drive 09 Row 7 drive 01 Row 2 drive 02 Column 5 sense 03 Column 4 sense 04 Row 0 drive 05 Column 3 sense 06 Column 2 sense 07 Column 1 sense 08 Row 1 drive 09 Row 3 drive 01 Input bit 7 A002 02 O utput bit 7 A002 03 Output bit 7 A003 04 O utput bit 6 6 A003 05 O utput bit 5 6 A003 06 utput bit 4 A003 07 Output bit 3 A003 08 utput bit 2 A003 09 Output bit 1 9 A003 10 O utput bit 0 9 A003 11 45 Voltsto displays 12 Ground D isplay 2 clock Display 2 data Display 1 clock Display 1 data Thermo Electron Corporation Front Panel Board Keyboard Inputs Connector P13 Spare keypad inputs Pinout 01 Row drive 02 Row 2 drive 03 Column 1 sense 04 Row 1 drive 05 Row 0 drive Keyboa rd Inputs A matrix encoded keypad of up to 20 keys may be connected to the front panel board at connector P10 Host Communications 24 series front panel boards based on PCB P N 11526 provide Port Configuration three serial communications ports one of which is normally used for communications with a site host computer W hen t
112. M D CX 5530 M size 1 4 M B share memory 1 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Counting Computers High Voltage Supply Detectors Counting Gas Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction Specifications Resolution up to 1024 x 768 at 24 bpp non interlaced 1024 x 768 at 18 bpp TFT LCD display supports 3 3 V LCD LCD Interface 18 bit TTL for TFT LCD only Dimensions L x W 145 x 102 mm 5 7 x 4 Power supply voltage 45 V 5 M aximum 45 V T ypical 15A Q945V O perating temperature 0 60 C 32 140 F O perating humidity 096 9096 relative humidity non condensing W eight 0 75 kg weight of total package Intel 7 3 MHz 87C51FA microprocessor with 32 kB EPROM and 256 byte RAM separate computer controlled thresholds for beta and alpha pulses anti coincidence circuitry to prevent alpha pulses from being counted in the beta channel M icroprocessor based computer controlled high voltage adjustment up to 2500 V failure sensing provided 16 separate gas flow proportional detectors subdivided into 34 counting zones 9 large 212 sq in 1368 sq cm detectors split into 3 counting zones 4 medium 113 sq in 728 sq cm detectors 3 small 50 sq in 325 sq cm detectors P 10 9096 argon 1096 methane 2 Technical M anual 1 7 Introduction Theory of Operation Gas Usage Onesize1A P 10 gas cylinder approximately 24 days 200cc
113. Personnel Contamination Monitor Eberline PCM 2 Technical Manual Analyze Detect Measure Control ELECTRON CORPORATION ON s Po e 11 l WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Electron has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Electron s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information Thermo Electron products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS 2004 Thermo Electron Corporation rights reserved Eberline PCM 2 is a registered trade name of Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Contents IntrodUctlon usssmannzinvasarsri i xi ber cami cru casn c da 1 1 General Description 1 1 Specifications 1 4 Theory of O peration 1 8 1 8 TMOJE ak 1 9 n 2 1 Mise Me RR 2 1 Electrical Power Installation 2 3 Other O ptional 2
114. Printer Option Printer Parts List Table 19 5 liststheitemsincorporated in the printer and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 5 Printer Parts List Item Ref Drawing PartName Description Part No 010 11534 D312 Mounting Shelf Printer 2 11351109 020 11534 D312 Printer Printer 9 Dot Matrix Serial Interface 1254 040 11534 D312 Cable Tie Ty wrap 1102 050 11534 03127 Clamp Adhesive Backed M M CL44 060 11534 D312 Cable Assembly Parallel Printer CA 92 15FT 110 11534 D312 Strain Relief Printer Cable WRSR14 Remote Annunciator OPT 4 Remote Annunciator Remote Annunciator Board Electronic Parts Thermo Electron Corporation The remote annunciator option consists of a module with Contamination Alarm Counting R eady and Recount lights T he panel has an alarm horn and an Alarm Acknowledge Alarm Ack switch W hen an alarm occurs during a measure cycle the C ontaminated light and the alarm horn turn on Pressing Alarm Ack silences the remote annunciator s alarm horn but not the instrument s horn A steady Ready light indicates the PCM 2 is ready to perform a measurement A flashing Ready light indicates a measurement in progress T he Recount light indicates the user has exited the PCM 2 before the measure cycle is complete T his option includes the cable C A 89 xxFT denotes cable length in feet which connects the PCM 2 to the remote annunciator W hen
115. Regulator 601 11534 03271 Steel Hole Plug 1 1 2 diameter M M BZ24 610 11534 D321 Eyebolts Cabinet Lifting SCM B24 610 11534 D321 Eyebolts Cabinet Lifting SCM B24 028 11534 D330 Track Pivot Plate Keyboard Slider 1211534196 042 11534 D330 Track Spring Bar Keyboard Slider ZP11534211 044 11534 D330 Track Spring Pivot Keyboard Slider ZP11534212 046 11534 D330 Track Rear Keyboard Slider ZP11534200 Bracket 048 11534 D330 Track Front Keyboard Slider ZP11534201 Bracket 114 11534 D330 Pin Door Pivot 7211534069 129 11534 0330 Pictoral Plate Detectors Layout 2911534361 138 11534 08330 Detector Protector Foot ZP11534352 228 11534 D330 Modified Chassis Keyboard Slider 7211534209 Track 510 11534 0330 Compression Pivot Pin Return 566030 Spring 516 11534 D330 Nylon Shoulder Keyboard Pivot 5 52 Washer 526 11534 D330 Thumb Screw 18 32 x 1 2 S S SCTS11 542 11534 D330 Extension Spring Keyboard Return SGEX20 588 11534 D330 Flush Latch Door HDLA16 616 11534 D330 Foam Tape Double Sticky HDTA31 630 11534 0330 Spacer 5 16 OD Aluminum SPXX52 122 11534 D330 Spacer 10 x 5 16 SPXX15 Aluminum Thermo Electron Corporation Standard Parts List Item Ref Drawing Part Name Description Part No No No 032 11534 D333 Holder Bracket Keyboard ZP11534198 052 11534 D333 Holder Keyboard ZP11534199 129 11534 0333 Pictor
116. S 485 interface A larger version of this draw ing is located in Chapter 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual 12 3 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface RS 232 to RS 485 Interface Parts List 12 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 4 A101 CR1 Eberline 11451 91 Figure 12 2 11451 004 RS 232 to RS 485 interface components A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation General Description External Connections Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 13 Modular Detector Board Each detector in the PCM 2 is served by an independent circuit board that combinesthe functions of high voltage power supply signal amplifier pulse height discriminator and dual channel counter By mounting these boards directly to the rear of the detector chambers the need for high voltage cables and expensive coax connectors has been eliminated and the effects of any single failure isolated to one detector All functions of the modular detector boards M D B are controlled by a single chip microprocessor In addition to the control logic this device contains program ROM and working random access memory T he processor an Intel 83C51FA is capable of outputting pulse width modulated signals which are filtered to provide D C levels which control the high voltage supply and determine alpha and beta pulse height thresholds Communications with the main computer of the PCM 2 are implemented through the p
117. S prompt Thermo Electron Corporation Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator Theinstallation disk e Creates anew directory labeled II and installs the following files in the new directory CWBAUDIO BIN CWBAUDIO INI CWBINIT EXE CWBMIX EXE e Replaces the autoexec bat file with an autoexec bat containing the following lines PATH 2 REM Set sound card REM XC KK KE XC XX EXE C 1BMI CWBMIX M215 15 Wz15 15 L 15 15 1 Fz15 15 C 1 1 BLASTER A220 15 01 T4 REM Start PCM2 program REM CD PCM PCM2 55 Replaces the config sys file with a configuration file that contains REM Set Sound Card DEVI Vi bmiiVcwbi ni t exe 0 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 11 Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator Troubleshooting If the sound annunciation stops 1 RemovetheRF shield covering the PC motherboard and confirm that the sound card s speaker cable is still connected and that the card is seated in the expansion slot If any of the above are not secure connect or reseat accordingly 2 After turning off the power to the PCM 2 install a known operational VEBD 52A card in the slot connect the speaker cable and verify that the board test works 3 If the above steps do not solve the problem reinstall the speaker software and the autoexec bat and config sys files from the installation disk Voice Annunciator Table 19 4 list
118. T he scanner mounting hardware and display pane badge interface hardware for this option has been designed around a specific set of code density and focus distance parameters T hermo Electron can accommodate many other user specific code reading requirements with respect to these scanner mounting and code density focus considerations Caution T he Intemec 2861 scanner emits a laser light beam which can be hazardous if viewed directly Adequate precautions should be taken to avoid direct exposure of the beam to the eyes A Configuration Thelntermec M 2681A01 scanner unit must be specially configured for use with C ode 39 Its default parameters 9600 baud 7 data bits even parity and 1 stop bit must be changed to 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit In addition the postamble variable must be set up as follows POSTAMBLE ENABLED carriage return Refer to the M odd 2861A01 U sr sM anual for the specific parameter settings for other barcode types Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 47 Options Optional Features Intermec Barcode Reader Parts List T able 19 15 lists the items incorporated in the Intermec barcode reader and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair 19 48 PCM 2 Technical M anual Table 19 15 Intermec Barcode Reader Parts List Item Ref No Drawing Part Name Description Part No No 010 11534D378 Foam Single Sti
119. Thermo Electron Corporation System Adjustments Thermo Electron Corporation Options Access Control ThePCM 2 commandsthe exit gate lock to be energized locked continuously whilethe unit isturned on and operational in any mode other than when posting the All Clear instrument status T he exit gate is unlocked whenever the instrument is intentionally turned off or whenever electrical power is otherwise interrupted i e in the case of a power outage T he entry gate is only locked during the brief All Clear instrument status periods when in use Note T he gate locks used on the PCM 2 access control unit are electromagnets which when energized with the gates open can erase or scramble data stored on magnetic media e g computer floppy disks audio and video tape magnetic ID badges and credit and bank cards T herefore users and maintenance personne should avoid bringing magnetic media in close proximity with the magnetic exit gate latch when the exit gate will be open for longer than 5 seconds A T heunit s entry and exit gates are each equipped with a gas cylinder return spring and air dashpot dampener which interact to smoothly return the exit gate back to the fully closed and locked position T he gates dampeners have been adjusted at T hermo Electron during system assembly to sufficiently deacelerate the returning gate from any open position D ueto variances between the air dashpot components themselves each access control unit
120. Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual E 1 2 Detector High Voltage and Leak Test Procedure P N 104294525 BLANK PAGE E 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation BLANK PAGE Thermo Electron Corporation Radiation Measurement amp Security Products USA PO Box 2108 Santa Fe 87504 2108 USA 505 471 3232 ext 7215 505 478 7215 direct 515 428 7229 fax UK Bath Road Beenham Reading AG SPR England 444 01118971 2121 444 0 118 971 2835 fax Europe outside he UK Frauenauracher Strasse 96 091058 Erlangen 4901 9131 99 0 449 0 9131 909 216 fax Fest of Work iktoriastrasse 5 D 42923 Wernelskrchen Germany 490 21 96 7228 0 449 0 21 96 72 20 24 25 fax www therno com rmp www thermo com security
121. WAV LFoot wav LFTFTOUT WAV LHand wav Lhip wav LSHOULDR WAV NINE WAV ONE WAV OutOFSRV WAV Password wav PSTIONI WAV PSTION2 WAV Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator Enter position two Face right Face in turn head right Face out turn head right Instrument failure Five Four Hand probe in use ID entry error please re enter ID Entry OK Insert hands Enter job number Move left foot closer Left foot out of position Insert left hand Move left hip closer Move left shoulder closer Nine One Instrument out of service Enter password Assume position one Assume position twoj PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 9 Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator Basic Installation 19 10 PCM 2 Technical M anual RECOUNT WAV RFoot wav RHand wav Rhip wav RSHOULDR WAV RTFTOUT WAV SEVEN WAV SIX WAV StepDn wav STEPUP WAV TEN WAV THREE WAV TURNARND WAV TWO WAV Recount required Move right foot closer Insert right hand Move right hip closer Move right shoulder closer Right foot out of position Seven Six Please step down Please step up Ten Three Turnaround Two M ount the speaker as shown in Figure 19 3 M ount the sound card in a socket on the PC motherboard and insert the cable jack from the speaker in its O ut port Insert the installation disk in the PCM 2 floppy drive and type AMNSTALL Press Enter at the DO
122. Y3 sheet 180 Anode wire 0 001 diam stainless steel MEWI3 200 Teflon tape dot 1 2 diam HDTA88 010 11534 560 Probe chamber Long revised ZP11534551 020 11534 560 Chamber ring Long ZP11534332 190 11534 560 Probe gasket Long ZP11534372 210 11534 560 1 8 street elbow M odified ZP11534538 220 11534 560 1 8 quick coupling Socket FGPL19 010 11534 561 Probe chamber Medium revised ZP11534552 PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 5 Detectors Maintenance 020 11534 561 Chamber ring Medium 7211534339 190 11534 561 Probe gasket M edium ZP11534373 220 11534 561 1 8 street elbow M odified ZP11534538 230 11534 561 1 8 quick coupling Socket FGPL19 010 11534 562 Probe chamber Small revised ZP11534553 020 11534 562 Chamber ring Small ZP11534337 190 11534 562 Probe gasket Small ZP11534374 Drawing reference number m m rmv Figure 16 1 11534 560 Revised detector assembly long drawing 1 of 2 larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 16 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Detectors Maintenance 1 Emet nunbens refer to tine iem members on 2 per 11500 4308 POM 2 Revised Detector Procecune 3 Test the congleled Froda Asacenbiy per 1047974425 PCW 2 Detector Volhogs sei Lech Tent Processie Figure 16 2 11534 560 Revised detector assembly long draw ing 2 of 2 A larger vers
123. a files thus resetting the system to the default passwords 0000 low level and 9999 high leve It will be necessary to re enter all operating parameters Software Updates Update diskettes are shipped without the above data files however the latest set of parameters may be recovered from the front pane board s memory with the following procedure 1 Eject the old diskette from the drive which is located inside the electronics enclosure 2 Insert the new diskette 3 Reboot the system by pressing the Ctri Alt D el keystroke combination 4 When asked which parameters to use choose to retrieve parameters from the front panel board to create a new set of data files on the diskette Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 2 13 Installation Quick Start Instructions BLANK PAGE 2 14 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Normal Operation Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter3 Operation W hen the PCM 2 is not in use it continually updates background counts on all detector channels Asthis data is collected dependent variables such as count times and alarm set points are recalculated Approximately two minutes are required to obtain statistically valid beta backgrounds and up to twenty minutes of background counts are necessary for accurate alpha source detection however the PCM 2 will begin to operate as soon asthe beta channel backgrounds are valid Caution The PCM 2 will not beable
124. acrewa 4 to be by customer Postion product cables in slots wak m to attachment te Annunciator Coble YP11534518 end Front Panel Board to Instrument 10 attochment hardware provided Figure 19 10 11534 531 Wall mount remote annunciator assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 23 Options Access Control 19 24 Access Control System Operation PCM 2 Technical M anual OPT5 and OPT 5A Access Control T he access control option is a modular system of two entry and exit OPT 5 or one exit only O PT 5A hinged and locking gates that are mechanically and electronically integrated into the PCM 2 to control personnel egress from or ingress into the monitor T he system consists of the exit or entry gates supported by a rugged frame with ceiling and base assemblies which match and mount directly to the front of the PCM 2 unit Standard system features include 500 Ib electromagnetic gate locks thrust bearing supported swinging tubular steel and powder coated gates dampened gas cylinder gate return springs emergency exit gate lock override switch bar audible emergency exit gate lock override alarm and custom programmable relock alarm time delay relay O ptional features include e Audible visual remote exit gate lock override alarm Roof mounted local exit gate lock override alarm strobe beacon e
125. active low 0302 Recount LED drive active low 0410Buzzer drive active low 0503No signa 0611Alarm acknowledge switch active low 0704 Unused input active low 0812 Unused input active low 0905Ground 1013 5 Volt supply 1106 12 Volt supply 1214412 Volt supply 07 08 15No connection T his connection is typically made in two stages A short cable internal to the instrument runs from P6 of the computer board to a 15 pin D connector The signals are then brought to the remote annunciator via an extension cable that is of a length appropriate to the specific installation sit T his cable extends pins 1 2 5 6 9 10 11 13 and 14 of theD connector from the instrument to the annunciator Thermo Electron Corporation Options Printer Option Figure 19 7 11549 001 Remote annunciator component layout larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 19 Options Printer Option Figure 19 8 11549 002 Remote annunciator larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 20 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Wall Mount Remote Annunciator Remote Annunciator and Wall Mount Remote Annunciator Thermo Electron Corporation OPT 14 Wall M ount Remote Annunciator Options Wall Mount Remote Annunciator T hisoption is comprised of a kit which allowsthe user to wall mount
126. adder circuit T he output voltage is divided by a 1000 1 resistor network and compared to a reference voltage generated by filtering a pulse width modulated output from the microprocessor T his feedback loop controls the frequency of the inverter oscillator T wo additional comparators are used which interrupt the processor chip if the high voltage output goes out of tolerance H igh voltage is adjustable in 255 steps of slightly less than 10 V per step An adjustment potentiometer is provided for more precise calibration of the nominally 1000 1 voltage divider A 2 x 6 pin header located directly behind J1 configures the M D B for operation or calibration Placing a shorting jumper in position 1 the left most pair of pins instructs the microprocessor to operate as a normal detector board while position 2 designates a hand probe board Removing the jumper entirely selects high voltage calibration mode and jumpering Thermo Electron Corporation Threshold Values Thermo Electron Corporation Modular Detector Board Threshold Values position disables the high voltage power supply entirely Positions 3 4 and 5 should not bejumpered Jumper settings are read only when power is first applied to the board If the board is powered up with no jumper installed the power supply will be set for 1250 The actual output may be adjusted to this nominal value by potentiometer R 10 this isthe only calibration required sea high impeda
127. age In this case readjustment may be performed by loosening the switch mounting hardware and repositioning the switch relativeto is actuator or by simply bending the switch s integrated actuator Readjustment should yield very sensitive settings where the switch trips even under very slight detector panel movement W eight Switch The weight switch is located beneath the slotted grille foot platform in the base of the PCM 2 unit Itsfunction isto interrupt background measurement updating by sensing when a user has stepped up onto the unit 1 On newer PCM 2 units you can gain access to the switch by removing the screw mounted access panel on the rear basetrim On older units that do not havethis switch access panel access is gained only by tipping the unit back on an incline dolly to expose the switch from the underside of the unit 2 Removethe switch by loosening its mounting screws Retain the screws nut plate and switch actuator assembly U nsolder the switch from its electrical leads and extract the switch and wiring from the mounting bracket 3 Noting the positions of the switch leads on the switch contacts resolder the switch leads to the contacts of the new switch 4 Install thenew switch to the switch mounting bracket in reverse order of removal Thermo Electron Corporation Decontamination Cleaning Detector Maintenance Quick Purge Line Thermo Electron Corporation Maintenance Decontamination Cleaning 5
128. age and 32 kB of working RAM provides control and computational abilities T hree additional 32 kB banks of RAM are installed to provide a large buffer for history data By using RAM sockets that contain lithium batteries backup power may be supplied for data retention during power outages PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 1 Front Panel Board Circuit Description 11 2 Serial Ports PCM 2 Technical M anual Thefront panel board is based on an Intel 80C 51 microprocessor T his device can support up to 64 kB of external RAM and 64 kB of ROM All 1 0 devices are also mapped into external memory space A bi directional data bus is present on pins 32 39 of the processor T hese pins are also used to output the eight low order address bits at the beginning of each external memory cycle the 74H C 373 at A18 is used to latch this portion of the address under control of the Address Latch Enable ALE output on pin 30 of the processor chip T he eight high order address bits are sourced directly from pins 21 28 Instruction and data fetches from the EPROM A4 are performed when the processor s PSEN output pin 29 isactive low A logical high on this pin indicates that 1 0 accessisin process RAM in thelow 32 kB of address space always corresponds to memory chip A5 Addresses from 8000 FFFF hexadecimal may be mapped to any of thethree remaining RAM chips A7 or A8 or to thel O devices T his selection is made by parallel out
129. aintenance than do the standard cardboard framed 0 0005 in thick film protectors in that contaminated particulates released from users shoes are contained in thetake up roll when a fresh width of film is drawn over the detector T he M ylar Polyethylene Dispenser thinner M ylar amp material available with this option also decreases the impact to the overall sensitivity of the foot detector T able 19 16 lists the items incorporated in the M ylar Polyethylene Thermo Electron Corporation Parts List dispenser and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 16 M ylar amp Polyethylene Dispenser Parts List Ref No Drawing No Description PartNo 010 11534 D320 Roll Core Film Dispenser ZP11534301 020 11534 D320 Chassis Film Dispenser ZP11534299 030 11534 D320 Pan Film Dispenser ZP11534300 050 11534 D320 Clear Polyethylene Roll 0 0005 Thick x 200 ft 1132 060 11534 D320 Cardboard Core 11 8 ID x 20 1133 070 11534 D320 Foam Tape 1 4 x 1 2 HDTA7 080 11534 D320 Rubber Expansion Plug 11 16 diam M M RU104 090 11534 D320 Component Clip Driver Retainer MMCL14 110 11534 D320 Hex Socket Driver 3 16 hex MMM1166 Opt 11534 D320 Clear M ylar Film Roll 0 00016 Thick x 200 Ft MMM1139 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 51 Options Optional Features pm 7 amp WI amp d Wages v gt tis E J H im 1
130. al M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Gas Manager Parts List Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Figure 19 30 11582 003 Gas manager board component A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 T able 19 20 liststhe electronic items incorporated in the gas manager and contains parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 20 Gas M anager Parts List Item Ref Drawing PartName Description PartNo No 020 11534 0348 Mounting bracket Gas M anager ZP11534347 520 11534 D348 Gas M anager YP1157000 0 570 11534 D348 Metric Binder Head Screw M2 5x8 0 SCM B62 600 11534 D348 Knob Gas M anager HDKN2 Control 620 11534 D348 Solenoid Valve 12 VDC M EVE152 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 63 Options Optional Features 630 11534 D348 Solenoid Valve 3 Port 12 VDC M EVE 160 640 11534 D348 Plastic Hose Barb 10 32 1 8 Hose X FGPLIl 650 11534 D348 Brass Hose Barb 1 8 1 8 FGBR53 660 11534 0348 1 8 Hose Barbs FGPL7 670 11534 0348 016 Outlet M etering 10 32 1 8 Hose 53 Orifice 672 11534 D348 Plastic Reducer Fitting 1 8 M PT x 10 32 FGPL60 674 11534 D348 4 012 Inlet Metering Orifice 10 32 x 1 8 Hose 52 680 11534 D348 1 8 ID Tubing Clear PVC MMTUI 690 11534 D348 Seal Screw 310 32 x 3 16 w SCOR1003 o ring Leba Propre Sele PI tele 6 e PP
131. al Plate Detectors Layout 2 11534361 428 11534 0333 Keyboard VEIN47 514 11534 D333 Thumb Nut 10 32 Brass SCTS25 521 11534 D333 Panel Grommet 15 8x1x 1 32 M M RU38 528 11534 D333 Rubber Bumper M M RU24 530 11534 D333 Foam Tape Single Sticky HDTA12 544 11534 D333 Note Clip Keyboard Plate MMCL75 546 11534 D333 Round Handle Keyboard Plate HDHA24 592 11534 D333 Foam Grip Keyboard Bar M M RU92 616 11534 D333 Foam Tape Double Sticky HDTA31 632 11534 D333 Rubber Bumper Keyboard Bottom MM RU34 1 11534 D344 Front Panel Board Cable Assembly YP11534503 2 11534 D344 Clock Display 1 Cable Assembly YP11534507 3 11534 D344 Clock Display 2 Cable Assembly YP11534508 4 11534 D344 Traffic Light Cable Assembly YP11534506 5 11534 D344 Keypad Cable Assembly YP11534506 6 11534 D344 Upper Switch Cable Assembly YP11534509 1 11534 D344 Lower Switch Cable Assembly YP11534510 8 11534 0344 Display Cable Assembly CA 91 72 9 11534 D344 Floppy Disc Drive Cable Assembly VEM 183 10 11534 D344 Converter Board Cable Assembly YP11534504 11 11534 D344 Serial Data Cable Assembly YP11534516 12 11534 D344 Speaker Cable Assembly YP11534520 13 11534 D344 Low Voltage Cable Assembly YP11534501 Supply 14 11534 D344 Detector 1 Cable Assembly YP11534523 15 11534 D344 Detector 2 Cable Assembly YP11534524 16 11534 D344 6 Jumper Cable Assembly YP11534535 010 11534 D369 1 8 ID Tubing Red PVC MMTU70 020 11534 D369 005 Orifice 1 8 Hose Bar
132. alarms are minimized by operating a radiation monitor to alarm at ax fixed RDA with the maximum reasonable count time Theterm Fs is derived using the methods discussed earlier n any event Equation 4 the Error Propagation formula should be invoked and applied to all applicable variables As stated earlier this document is primarily a presentation of methods of applying what has been derived before in the area of statistical theory T he methods explained here are intended to be used as tools for simplifying the task of performing radiological counting exercises W hile this is far from an all inclusive discourse on the subject it is hoped that this discussion covers most of the aspects of radiation counting statistics that one is likely to encounter PCM 2 Technical M anual A 23 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Summary BLANK PAGE A 24 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Appendix Procedures General Notes Dueto the complexity of the PCM 2 it is not practical to describe each individual keystroke in this document Refer to this manual before and during checkout for more specific instructions particularly regarding the computer interface If checkout is to be performed at any location other than the T hermo Electron factory in Santa Fe it will be necessary to adjust the detector voltage to something other than 1550 V At altitudes lower than 6480 ft above sea level ASL a h
133. all detectors simultaneously replacing the existing values T his capability is useful during initial setup of the instrument however care must taken to preserve any special values required for individual detectors See D etector Parameters on page 2 10 Channel Override Parameters HIGH VOLTAGE VOLTS 1550 Alpha Channels Beta Channels ACTI VE Yes ACTI VE Yes THRESHOLD 45 THRESHOLD MAX 5 EFFICIENCY 22 0 EFFICIENCY 22 0 RDA DPM 5000 RDA DPM 25000 HI FALL CPS 100000 HI FALL CPS 100000 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 WEI FACTOR 50 0 WEI GHT FACTOR 10 0 SHIELD FACTOR 1 00 2 Technical M anual 5 15 Edit Instrument Configuration Parameters Instrument Configuration Parameters Serial Number Count Rate Units Activity Units Count M ode ID amp RWP Entry Methods Alarm Hold Time System Address Baud Rate amp Protocol 5 16 PCM 2 Technical M anual Instrument Configuration Parameters SERIAL NUMBER 0000 SYSTEM ADDRESS 1 COUNT RATE UNITS CPS BKG UPDATE AFTER ALARM No ACTIVITY UNITS DPS DAY FILE DIRECTORY STORAGE COUNT MODE in Count Time TRANSACTIONS No D ENTRY METHOD Keypad Only STATUS CHANGES No RWP ENTRY METHOD one SOURCE CHECK RESULTS No ALARM HOLD SEC 1 DISPLAY MIDWAY RESULTS No SYSTEM BAUD RATE 9600 HAND SWITCH REQUI RED Yes SYSTEM PROTOCOL LAN HIP SW TCH REQUIRED
134. as a constant Assembling the components equations 6 and 7 into Equation 4 yields Equation 8 B FF Eq 8 Example An alpha CAM equipped with multichannel analyzer is set up to monitor for plutonium contaminated particulates Background counts or count rates are the result of the presence of radon and thoron which produce a spectral distribution as illustrated in Figure A 1 Figure A 1 Alpha CAM Spectrum 2 Technical M anual A 3 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Basic M easurement Parameters Empirical data shows that counts collected in four regions of interest RO 1 have a consistent relationship in the absence of plutonium T hat relationship is expressed by Equation 9 where the four RO Isareidentified as R4 through and isa constant Eq 9 Furthermore when plutonium counts are present they occur in Rj so that in order to maintain the equality of Equation 9 the plutonium counts Pu must be subtracted from R4 T hisleads to the derivation of the mean plutonium counts or mean count rate as expressed by equations 10 and 11 Eq 10 R R 7 11 4 Equation 4 is applied to Equation 11 by first dissecting it into small easily managed parts that are illustrated by Equation 12 through Equation 20 for the derivation of the Pu standard deviation Equation 21 is the result of collecting all pertinent terms to solve for eal zl Eq
135. ate is exceeded T wo primary constraints control the appropriate count rate on which to alarm T he first of these isthe background count rate and what is deemed an associated false alarm rate or probability that background alone will randomly exceed the alarm set point T his determines the lower limit for an alarm set point T he second constraint is the upper limit on the alarm set point which ultimately determines the minimum activity above background that will cause an alarm with an associated probability or confidence level Each constraint will be considered individually and then in combination with each other Controlling False Alarm Rates What will be called a false alarm herein is an alarm caused by background alone Because the background count rate is random during any one counting interval the background count rate could assume any non negative value T hus even with a high alarm set point there will exist a finite probability that a T ypel false alarm will occur Accepting that false alarms will not be entirely eliminated the first step is to establish an A 14 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions acceptable probability of false alarm For a single measurement that small probability will be labelled p For multiple measurements be they sequential or simultaneous by way of multiple detector channel
136. average count rate produced by RDA in the presence of background is RD A x Eff Rg where Eff is the detector 4B efficiency counts disintegration T he net count rate produced by the source RD A and identified as Rs is expressed in Equation 39 RDA x Eff Rg Eq 39 Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions T heobvious redundance of Rg in Equation 39 is stated for a purpose that will be developed here T he term inside the square brackets represents Rs which is measured in an interval which will be identified asT s From the resultant count rate Rg the assumed background count rate average is subtracted to produceR s being previously determined hasa different time base identified as T g T he standard deviation of Rs determined by invoking Equation 4 is shown in Equation 40 Eq 40 RDAxEff R amp R Og j E Common practice isto maintain a long term background average such that Tgismuch greater than Ts T heresult of thisisthat the right hand term under the radical becomes negligibly small compared to the left hand term and is usually ignored as will bethe case throughout the rest of this discussion T he reader is cautioned however that in a counting exercise where T is approximately equal to Ts or worse less than the composite count time the identity of
137. ays three screens of data in rotation 1 System status gas off gas flowing over pressure etc 2 Current working pressure in inches of water 3 Short and long term gas consumption Gas use is expressed as the percentage of time the inlet valve has been opened in order to maintain pressure T he long term value represents total consumption since the counter was last reset or sincethe unit was powered on Short term use covers the latest five minutes If a gas leak occurs the short term number will increase more rapidly than the long term value If the control knob is pressed the display will prompt for entry of a password T his value is permanently set at 1287 Rotate the knob until the first number 1 shows then press the knob R epeat this procedure for the other three digits If the knob is pressed and held for 3 to 4 seconds during normal operation both gas use counters will be reset to zero T his should be done after purging the system to obtain steady state gas consumption values N o password is required to reset the counters O nce a correct password has been entered the first screen displayed is pressure setpoint Rotate the knob to increase or decrease this setting T o accept the displayed value press the knob T he second control screen offers to initiate an automatic purge If the knob is rotated one click N o will be replaced by Y es PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 59 Options Optional Features
138. bly A Yes in this field causes the PCM 2 to save measurement results for transmission to a site host computer An Alarms in this field causesthe PCM 2 to save only alarmed measurement results for transmission to a site host computer Note If this value 15 set to Yes or Alarms when the instrument is not connected to a host computer the transaction buffer will eventually overflow causing the unit to remove itself from service T o reset the transaction buffer escape back to the Status menu and select O verall M onitor Status Pressing the F2 key while in this display will clear the buffer A If a printer is attached to the PCM 2 and this field contains a Y es value a report of each measurement cycle is automatically printed If this field contains an Alarms value the report is printed only after an alarm has occurred during the measurement cycle An initialization string sent to an attached parallel printer just prior to printout of PCM 2 reports and data Note A character pitch of not lessthan 12 cpi is necessary for printing the PCM 2 Calibration Report A PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 17 Edit Instrument Configuration Parameters Day File Directory Printer Type Uses Before Background Update Background Update After Alarm Day File Directory Storage Display Midway Results Switch Req d Access Control Option Hi amp Lo Level Password 5 18 PCM 2 Technical M anual A string identifyi
139. bration report and then again in the data collected when the monitor is used Bac kg round Checks After purging the detectors edit the system override parameters to obtain an operating voltage of 1550 V or the closest available increment All other parameters should be left at their default settings D isplay the background averages screen and verify that none of the detectors are indicating high voltage or communications failures Permit the instrument to accumulate background data for at least 15 minutes After thistime there should beno channel failures of any sort indicated indicating that there are no problems or defects in the modular detector boards gas supply or detectors Source Plateaus selat any two or more detectors G enerate source plateaus on each of the detectors from 1450 1750 V and verify that the plateaus are normal Count times of 30 seconds per step should be used T he sources used are to be of an emission rate that 30 seconds is a reasonable time Background Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual B 3 Procedures Statistical Variance Test B 4 Statistical Variance Test Optional PCM 2 Technical M anual subtraction should be selected using the data taken with the background plateaus Select the high voltage appropriate the elevation and download that high voltage to all channels Initiate a statistical variance test of 100 count cycles Print the test results and verify that the
140. bs FGM 150 030 11534 D369 Quick Disconnect 1 8 Hose Barb x1 8 FGPL31 Coupling Flow 040 11534 D369 90 degree Quick 1 8 Hose Barb x1 8 FGPL46 Disconnect Flow 050 11534 D369 Hose T 1 8 Hose Barbs FGPL7 010 11534 D371 1 4 ID Tubing Blue PVC MM TU62 020 11534 D371 4 Quick Disconnect 1 4 Hose Barb x FGPL33 Coupling 1 8 Flow 030 11534 D371 1 8 ID Tubing Blue PVC MMTU71 040 11534 D371 Reducer Fitting 1 4 to 1 8 Hose FGPL56 Barbs 060 11534 D371 Hose T 1 4 Hose Barbs FGPL2 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 20 5 Standard Parts List 20 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Item Ref Drawing Part Name Description Part No No No 034 11534 D375 X Display Panel M olded Console ZP11534214 106 11534 D375 Stiffener Bracket Console Keypad 1211534248 127 11534 0375 Blank Panel Card Reader 7211534295 156 11534 D375 Spacer Bracket Keypad ZP11534367 322 11534 D375 Cable Assembly PC Serial YP11534516 324 11534 D375 Cable Assembly PC Speaker YP11534520 331 11534 D375 Jumper Cable 9 pin 6 YP11534535 340 11534 D375 Video Cable 6 ft VGA 91 72 345 11534 D375 Printer Cable Parallel 15 ft CA 92 15FT 402 11534 D375 Front Panel SP24B 410 11534 0375 SBC Single Board YP11534741 Computer 412 11534 0375 Power Cable Floppy Disk Drive VECA92 414 11534 D375 PC AT Disk amp 1 0 VEBD16 416 11534 D375 LCD Flat panel dis
141. c minute W hen setting up a new instrument or an instrument that has been disconnected from its gas supply adjust the flow to 0 8 liter per minute 800 cc min for four hoursto purge the detectors completely Note T o avoid bursting or damaging the M ylar amp entrance windows do not exceed 1 liter per minute 1 000 cc min at any time A If replacing a detector the replacement detector should be purged on the bench prior to installation or purged in place after installation using the Quick D etector Purge gas supply hose coil located behind the flow meter mounting bracket If the latter method is used for detector purging disconnect the red gas supply hose from the subject detector and plug the quick purge linein its place T his procedure effectively reroutes the gas flow Thermo Electron Corporation Electrical Power Installation Thermo Electron Corporation Installation Electrical Power Installation from the system s gas supply harnessto the purging detector U tilization of this quick purging hose feature will provide complete purging of a large PCM 2 detector within approximately 20 minutes at a nominal gas flow rate of 200 cc min Faster purging times can be achieved by increasing the gas flow rate however caution must be exercised to avoid bursting the detector s mylar face A more thorough explanation of the quick purging line feature appears uick Purge Line on page 9 3 Each of the sixteen detector chambers
142. ceiver chip A102 is protected by spark gaps GT 1 and GT 2 and surge suppressor CR1 CRA igh voltage on either of the RS 485 communication lines initially is clamped by to CR4 and current limited by R12 amp R13 GT 1 and GT 2 provide protection after voltage breakdown has occurred A grounding lug is provided on the chassis of units that usethis board For best operation of the protection circuit this lug should be connected to a good earth ground by a 14 gauge copper wire If this board isto beused with an unregulated supply as in the PCM 2 regulator A103 and C 1 may be added and jumper JP 1 cut PCM 2 Technical M anual 12 1 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface RS 232 to RS 485 Interface Parts List 12 2 RS 232 to RS 485 Interface Parts List PCM 2 Technical M anual TheRS 485 communication protocol defines only voltage levels of transmission and electrical characteristic of the transmitters and receivers The character protocol baud rate number character bits stop bits and parity must be selected to match for both transmitters and receivers Table 12 2 Interface Parts List T able 12 2 lists the items incorporated in the RS 232 to RS 485 interface board and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Ref Desig Drawing No Part Name Description Part No A100 11451 002 LC AX233 101 11451 02 LC Dual comparator ICACA372 A102 11451 C02 I C RS 485 Transceiver ICXXAS369
143. cessary for normal repair Table 19 12 ICI Swipe Card Reader Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 020 11534 D324 Cable Assembly ICI Swipe Reader YP11354512 030 11534 D324 ICI Swipe Reader Bar Code VEIN 43 040 11534 D324 Back Plate ICI Swipe Reader ZP11468191 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 39 Options Optional Features XICO Insert Card Reader 19 40 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 19 20 11534 324 ICI swipe card reader assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 7C XICO Insert Card Reader The magn amp ic stripe card reader provides a fast and accurate alternative to keyboard entry of the U ser ID number T he magnetic stripe reader isa push pull type that requires the user to insert a magnetic card into the card guide T he magnetic card reader is mounted in the lower cutout of the console panel s display panel beneath the CRT T he recommended encoding for magnetic cards used in this reader is ANSI ISO BCD with the data track located at AN SI Track 2 and the timing track at AN SI T rack 3 T he recommended density is 105 bits per inch bpi T his will allow up to 39 data characters PCM 2 allows 9 characters in the U ser ID and RW P fields The center of magnetic strip should be located 7 16 0 44 from the edge of the card T he recommended width of the magnetic card is 7 16 0 44 Thermo Electron Corporation Option
144. cessor ICCM AC51FA A2 11526 D03 IC Triple 3 Input NOR ICHCA7427 9 10 12 30 11526 003 IC 3 to 8 Line Decoder ICCM AHC138 A4 11526 011 IC 64K x 8 CMOS EPROM Consult Thermo A5 6 7 8 11526 D03 IC 32K x 8 Static CM OS ICCM 43C256 11526 D11 RAM A11 13 31 11526 D03 IC Voltage Reg 5 Low 4941 A14 29 11526 D03 IC RS 485 Transceiver ICCM A485 15 17 11526 003 IC CM OS UART ICCM A82510 A18 23 25 11526 D03 IC Octal Buffer ICHCA74373 19 22 11526 003 IC Octal Latch ICHCA74374 A26 27 28 11526 D11 IC CMOS to RS 232 ICXXM AX233 interface A32 33 34 11526 D11 IC T Channel Power Buffer ICXX30 Cl 11526 D03 Capacitor 22 pF CPCE220P3R C2 11526 D03 Capacitor 33 pF CPCE330P3P 3 5 11526 003 Capacitor 0 1 uF CPCE104P3N 7 9 10 12 15 17 28 38 41 C6 11526 D03 Capacitor 10 uF CPTA100M 4X C11 16 37 42 11526 D03 Capacitor 22 uF CPTA220M 4H C29 36 11526 D03 Capacitor 0 01 uF CPCE103P3N DS1 11526 D03 LED Internal Resister Green OPLP25 5 Volt HSA13 11526 D03 Heat sink High Power 220 M EHS22 HSA11 31 11526 D03 Heat sink Med Power 220 M EHS20 P1 11526 D03 Connector 7x 0 100 Header COM R107 P2 4 11526 D03 Connector DB 9 Female R A PCB COM R1209 p5 7 12 11526 D03 Connector 12 x 0 100 Header COMR112 11526 D11 P8 9 11526 D03 Connector 6 x 0 100 Header COM R706 P10 11 11526 003 Connector 9 x 0 100 Header COM R809 P13 11526 D03 Connector 5 x 0 100 R A Header COM R1205
145. ch detector replacement requirements See C hapter 19 ptions PCM 2 detectors are quite sensitive to contamination due to out gassing of various substances that can come in contact with internal surfaces of the probe chamber or those of its gas delivery components W hen this happens the subject detectors can experience a notable decrease in efficiency characterized by low beta background values T his poisoning of the detector chamber can be caused by its exposureto any organic solvents that are present in substances such as but not limited to adhesives sealants and lubricants T his is especially true of RTV silicone adhesives Avoid using these types of substances in areas or on components that are in direct contact with or carry counting gasto the internal surfaces of the detector assemblies PCM 2 detectors have been designed to be field repairable during the course of normal instrument usage one or more detectors may go out of service dueto M ylar amp face punctures anode wire breakage or other internal electrical failures n the event of detector failure repair becomes necessary T hermo Electron has developed specific processes for the repair or complete rebuild and testing of PCM 2 probes which vary depending on the configuration of detector assembly involved Identification of the type of detector assembly to be rebuilt is of primary consideration in the rebuilding effort See T able 16 1 above Thermo
146. circled numbers refer to fine items on 0 PCM2 of the tape fush and trim flush length ond 2 Keyboor Hol 2 PE s Hi H i i m S dn i cid cat of 2528 286 H her Pl Figure 22 35 11534 333 Keyboard pivot plate assembly 22 40 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation TCC enue W 6214291 Z Wd 8 225 5 219 2 episiepun 5 12 0245 UO eqp 291 AQ 21 0 ypa Ajbi3edsa axbads au joysu U2 9 jn2 uauj spo 3394403 JsyDads Suy jj yep 30 oep ses By enss puibuo TINO p b l si sy 6 0 Uld y 0 06 018 doim auim QZ JpU M SUIS 0 04 Ug 2201 24 jn2 spsoagq UMOYS SD A J y uo 941 01 1595012 1 BY AO 241 0 5 5 Sl 104 0215 axDadE SIU u j0 oonpur Aojod S ayy 1091 FON v S10 SuluO S 22ubjsiSay 4 U 51 8540190909 T 2 d gm m perj 59 COGLNZ Qo BH zo p eS aou ass N 3ueuoduioo peog
147. cky HDTA16 020 11534D378 Cable Assembly Intermec Reader YP1153438 6 030 11534D378 Intermec Reader Bar Code M EVE166 040 115340378 Reader Power Supply 115VAC M EVE167 042 115340378 Reader Interface Box ADP 232 M EVE190 044 11534D386 Reader Cable Reader to ADP Box M EVE191 050 11534D378 Mounting Bracket Power Supply ZP11534385 060 11534D378 Mounting Bracket Reader ZP11534384 070 115340378 Hinge Bracket Reader ZP11534383 080 115340378 Faceplate Card Badge Insertion 2 11534382 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Ff Vent Pod in Loser Dectrosice Assenby 11554 0314 1 Encireled refer to Gee on BOU 2 Members in cquares mter to Ren on PONZ 3 Rens 070 Peooer Hage Brakes mount osymmertscollw oe shown herir Let Side Whew Ths matien requires remoti of the floppy disk dive Cover Piste requ Saona View throwgh Retain the dab dive matic meuting lovenars for rosssentiy Apply medum thresc in soled al iesicfiction Upper Electronica Encicaure Figure 19 23 11534 378 Intermec barcode reader assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 49 Options Optional Features Polyethylene Dispenser 19 50 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 19 24 11534 386 Intermec barcode r
148. cond and more direct approach isto disable alpha channel sum zone alarms sincethisisthe most frequent alarm pattern caused by radon contamination Sum zone alarms are disabled by raising the sum zone RDA high enough so that single channel alarms will always occur before a sum PCM 2 Technical M anual 2 11 Installation Quick Start Instructions Softw are Maintenance Restoring Default Values 2 12 PCM 2 Technical M anual zone alarm will occur T his is accomplished when sum zone RD As are at least twice the single channe RDA or the maximum RDA the instrument is operated in M ode 2 T heradon compensation algorithm uses count information from both alpha and beta detector channels and operates on the assumption that nonnatural contaminants will be either pure alpha or pure beta emitters For this reason radon compensation should not be enabled when isotopes such as uranium which emit both alpha and beta particles areto be measured All changes made to instrument and detector parameters sum zone groups etc are immediately written both to the instrument s disk and to nonvolatile memory on the front panel computer board W henever the PCM 2 is powered up it will first attempt to reload its parameters from the disk if therequired files are missing the program will offer to recreate them using data from the front panel board T third option isto reinstate the factory default values and start over from scratch Before deleti
149. count times of at least 100 seconds and preferably more for accuracy T his test acquires counts from all active channels for N count cycles where N isselected by the operator Each count cycleisT seconds long whereT is the selected or calculated count time currently used for measurements After completing N cycles the instrument will calculate the mean the variance and the variance divided by the mean for every active channel T hese results will then be presented in tabular form and may be printed if desired If the variance divided by the mean for any channel falls outsidethe range of 0 67 to 1 50 thechannel is probably noisy Thistest performs N measurements where N is selected by the operator Each measurement is performed just as if a person were in the monitor At the conclusion of each cycle the instrument checks for alarms and increments a counter if one or more channels have alarmed At the conclusion of this test the number of alarms divided by N will determine the unit s false alarm rate Selecting this item causes the PCM 2 to generate a calibration report If the user has not entered a serial number for the instrument other than 0000 default value an editing screen for the serial number will appear T he user may edit the serial number if desired T he report will then be generated using the new serial number if one was entered If a printer is available the report may be printed for a permanent record 2 Techn
150. ctor efficiencies are determined by measuring calibrated sources and then dividing the measured count rates by the known activities of the Sources 1 Select the efficiency calculation function 2 Enter activities for the alpha and beta calibration sources 3 Select a detector and channel to calibrate T he selected detector will acquire counts in the specified channel for the count time selected W hen the count cycle is completed a new efficiency will be calculated and displayed on the M easured Efficiency line 4 Press the 22 key to store the new efficiency It is not automatically saved 5 f desired repeat the count cycle by pressing Enter T wo count cycles must be performed T he first count cycle is performed with the unit unoccupied T he second count cycle is performed with a person in theunit in counting position Shield factors are determined for all detectors simultaneously Save them as set A count time of minimum of 100 seconds will be used for this measurement 2 Technical M anual B 5 Access Gate Test If the access gate option is installed perform two measurement cycles one with a source and one without a source T he access gate should be locked during Background U pdate mode T est mode and at the beginning of a measurement cycle At the end of a clean measurement cycle the access gate unlocks and the Exit screen is displayed T his condition remains until the user opens the gate and exi
151. ctors e High sensitivity screens are available as an option replacing the heavier rugged steel detector screens normally provided for rough or high usage environments The PCM 2 also features networking capability A central computer software package which operates on a PC is available for communicating with the PCM 2 network and archiving counting transactions to disk or printer PCM 2 operating parameters can be controlled by the central computer as well as locally through the keyboard Local connection of a printer to each PCM 2 is also supported Specifications Mechanical W idth 36 00 in 91 44 cm D epth 27 00 in 68 58 cm H eight 86 50 in 219 71 cm W eight 660 Ibs 300 kg T emperature O perating From 32 F to 113 F 0 to 45 C Storage From 4 F to 140 F 20 to 60 H umidity O perating 0 to 95 non condensing Voltages Input 90 132 or 180 264 Vac 50 60 Hz 250 W maximum AC Fuse 3 0 Amp slow blow at 250 14 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction Specifications D isplay 10 4 VGA color LCD panel 640 x 480 resolution 85 264 V ac 50 60 H z on off brightness contrast controls 100 000 hour operation reliability Serial Ports H ost computer port Selectable between either uLAN and non uLAN standard binary protocol data format 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 address marker bit only if uLAN is selected o
152. d Plateau Source Plateau Efficiencies sHield factors statistical Variance Test False Alarm Test calibration Report T heinstrument s ability to detect radiation may be checked by placing a Source on one or more detectors and verifying that an alarm occurs Source Check mode uses the same count times and parameters as normal counting mode however for convenience it is not necessary to closethe body position switches C ount cycles are run continuously until Check modeis exited and all detectors that have alarmed are shown in red on the map display simplifying the task of remembering which detectors have been successfully checked Results are stored in SO U RCE T XT and can be viewed or printed at the conclusion of the test T he results are stored in a day fileif the user has enabled this feature 2 Technical M anual 7 1 Calibration Background Plateau 7 2 Background Plateau PCM 2 Technical M anual Due to the large number of detectors in the PCM 2 plateauing each with single source is a daunting proposition An alternative is to use background radiation over a long period i e overnight to verify that all detectors exhibit similar responses Seefigs 7 1 and 7 2 This process takes the instrument out of service for several hours but runs without any operator intervention Background plateau results have three main uses 1 T he data is subtracted from source plateaus to correct for background
153. d Reader Parts List Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features OPT 7B ICI Swipe Card Reader T he bar code reader provides a convenient means of entering a U ser ID number T his reader is swipe reader in that it requires the user to pass acard with a bar codeon it through the card guide T he bar code reader will read bar codes over the speed range of 3 to 30 inches per second ips at the recommended density of the encoded bar A non read is indicated by illuminating both the red and green LED s A good read is indicated by illuminating the green LED T hereader will read cards in either direction T hereader is mounted in the lower cutout of the console 5 display pane beneath the CRT T hereader is capable of reading either visible bar codes or bar codes hidden behind a special black filter T he reader is optimized to read bar codes whose narrow bar is greater than 0 013 inches H owever bar codes with a narrow bar width of 0 010 inches can beread with someslight deterioration of the high speed scanning rate T he recommended distance from the edge of the card to the center of the bar code strip is 3 8 0 375 The recommended width of the bar code strip is 1 2 0 50 ThelCI swipe bar code Rreader is a low cost unit capable of reading only the same codes as does the IC I insert bar code reader T able 19 12 lists the items incorporated in the ICI swipe card reader and should contain all parts ne
154. d rates If a Background Plateau has already been run using the same voltage increments and covering a range that matches the source plateau high voltage range background corrections may be applied Both alpha and beta source plateaus should be run to obtain a full set of results It is appropriate to run ahigh voltage plateau on three detector channels to determine the optimum voltage for all channels Once an operating voltage has been determined enter it through the Override Parameters screen to set all detectors to this value Individual detector voltages may be adjusted through the D etector Parameters screen or the View Plateau display for that channel Return to the Background Averages screen and verify that all detectors give reasonable count rates at the selected voltage W e recommend running source plateaus on at least two detectors to ensure an appropriate selection of operating voltage for the entire system V erify similar resultsfor all detectors that are plateaued U sing the Efficiencies command under the Calibration heading calibrate each detector with alpha and beta sources of known activities For this purpose 100 cm plate sources are preferred over smaller coin sources U se high activity sources when possible because they provide accurate results with short count times Note T he isotopes used for calibration should have similar energies to those isotopes that will be measured during normal operation A Thermo Electron
155. dered suspect Note Becausethe size location and orientation of a detector affect its background counts each detector has a geometry factor that is used to compensate for these variables D ue to the inherently lower background count rates the default alpha sensitivity factor is 0 10 allowing an acceptable range in count rates from 0 1 to 10 times the average A T he probability of detecting contamination of the specified RD A Possible values are 5096 75 90 95 99 and 99 996 See Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological M easurements for a detailed discussion of this parameter Thetimein seconds for which all channels of the PCM 2 will count A multiplier of the background count rate standard deviation that influences the false alarm rate See Appendix A Statistical Control of Radiological M easurements If a background update count differs from the stored average background rate by this many standard deviations the new rate will immediately replace the old If the detectors on which this occurs alarmed on the last measurement they are assumed to be contaminated A sum zone is a user defined group of two to four detectors that are grouped together to enhancethe monitor s ability to detect contamination Spread over an area shared by several adjacent detectors T he alpha or beta sum zone alarm set point defines the activity required within the sum zone area before a sum zone alarm istriggered See Sum Zone Setup
156. dhesive Backed MMCL54 110 11534 D542 Cable Tie Ty wrap HDM 193 140 11534 D542 1 4 ID Tubing Red PVC MM TU60 150 11534 D542 Reducer Fitting 1 4 1 8 Hose FGPL56 Barbs 160 11534 D542 1 8 ID Tubing Red PVC MMTU70 170 11534 D542 Quick disconnect 1 4 Hose Barb FGPL43 In Line Coupling Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 20 Standard Parts List T able 20 1 liststhe items used in the PCM 2 that are not specified in the subassembly or options sections of this manual Each D rawing N o group below is keyed to an associated PCM 2 assembly drawing in C hapter 22 D rawings in which parts are keyed to numbers T he use of equivalent parts with the same operating characteristics is not restricted Table 20 1 Standard Parts List Item Ref Drawing Part Name Description Part No No 078 11534 D304 Graphic Overlay Keypad ZP11534124 136 11534 D304 Back plate Keypad ZP11534125 137 11534 0304 Mylar Insulator Keypad ZP11410021 320 11534 D304 Cable Assembly Keypad YP11534511 408 11534 D304 Keypad 20 Key M atrix SWM 143 004 11534 D106 Back plate Instructional Label 2 11534086 1 006 11534 D106 Back plate Instructional Label 2 11534087 2 130 11534 D106 Instructional Label Clock Display 1 ZP11534084 132 11534 D106 Instructional Label Clock Display 2 ZP11534085 312 11534 D106 Cable Assembly Clock Display 1 YP11534507 314
157. e Lowes 2s 222 FRATRE IRAE LEER ACE EE CEL E FES FECE Lik Leh FACIEI IF 7 402104105 29 4 oway L 06 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL Z Ajquasse pasinay T9S PESTT 28 22 4 Le T6 cc W je91u429 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy Ajquasse Aejdsip jaued 34 LEL pESTT 8 22 an Aaidsig vamas 1064 097 se Jjoysu as we Jung 3013 Wid Teg oj 900 dz Qo jo puo 27 jas PUJ ZW2d OW zeg POUR gt eec Lr re m uao puo sapun uaasi25 104 GOT 24 qusssy ojdsy jaung 1944 C YESLLdA E E j 1 i i 5 5 8 i i H ej Mauno 5 zumoa j sq oso ADW jS 149 fjquessy Jepoey Bussp uoi jazag 2450 puo 498425 IND amway Mun pepe ui 143 pio podn o deys uonouojsur 4 Adding ag o 907 wag jejndun oj 91925 jo ejexkuo Z Buen 12759 09180 puo uwous 190496 JOU 007 Aquesey meubd 104 odur Dapeeu oso Kou
158. e detection of these activities in the allowed the instrument will display a high background failure message and cease to perform measurements System Parameters Fixed Count Time Mode ALPHA RDA UPPER LIMIT DPS 25 0 RDA UPPER LIMIT DPS 150 ALPHA SENSITIVITY 0 050 BETA SENSITIVITY 0 10 RDA CONFI DENCE 95 COUNT TI ME SEC 1 00 S GMA FACTOR 4 00 BACKGROUND SIGMA FACTOR 4 00 ALPHA SUM ZONE ALARM DPS 23 3 BETA SUM ZONE ALARM DPS 117 ALPHA SUM CH ALARM DPS 83 3 BETA SUM CH ALARM DPS 500 Calculated Values MAX ALPHA CHANNEL RDA DPS 2 56 MAX BETA CHANNEL DPS 17 9 FALSE ALARM RATE 9 0 19 hese are the maximum acceptable values for RD A If changes background count rates raise the calculated RD A for any channels above these limits ahigh background alarm is posted Thermo Electron Corporation Alpha amp Beta Sensitivities RDA Confidence Count Time Sigma Factor Background Sigma Factor Alpha amp Beta Sum Zone Alarm Alpha amp Beta Sum Channel Thermo Electron Corporation Alarm Edit Fixed Count Time M ode A ratio above and below the mean of background counts beyond which a single detector s background is determined to be indicative of a detector failure T he default valueis 0 5 for the beta channels meaning that a detector with more than twice or less than half as many counts as the system average is consi
159. e detector and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair T histable does not include parts references for the remote alarm annunciator wall mount bracket For wall mount parts listings refer to T able 19 7 Table 19 8 Detector Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 100 11534 C529 PCBA Remote Alarm Annunciator YP11549000 140 11534 C529 Annunciator Panel Remote Alarm Annunciator ZP11534595 160 11534 C529 Rubber Foot Press On MMRU72 N A 11534 C529 Interconnect Cable Remote Alarm Annunciator CA109XXFT N A 11534 C529 Fire Alarm Pull Station Remote Gate Unlock Switch M EVE184 N A 11534 C529 Cable Assembly Local Alarm Beacon YP11534594 N A 11534 C529 Strobe Beacon Alarm LPAS32 19 28 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Access Control Table 19 9 liststhe electronic items incorporated in the detector and should Parts List contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 9 Access Control Parts List Item Ref Drawing No PartName Description Part No 180 11534 D477 Bearing Support Lower ZP11534430 300 11534 0477 Thrust Bearing Lower Gate Shaft M M BG15 320 11534 D477 Flanged Bearing Lower Gate Shaft M M B617 322 11534 D477 Hole Plug Entry Gate Shaft M M BZ27 360 11534 D477 Furniture Glide Base Support 112 180 1
160. e is performed in a manner similar to the first Again time remaining is counted down on the position display panel clock Alarms if any resulting from both count cycles are displayed graphically on theLCD pand An example of atypical alarm display appears at the end of this section A display of hand probe readings on the alarm information screen results when the hand probe is removed from its cradle on the side of the instrument T his display disappears when the hand probe 15 again replaced into its cradle An audible alarm also sounds this may be canceled by pressing Alarm Ack If no radiation has been detected the user is instructed to exit the unit M easurement results are printed or stored for host computer retrieval if the instrument is so configured M icroprocessors are used at all levels within the PCM 2 from the main System controller down to individual detector modules T here are virtually no switches jumpers or potentiometers for the technician to set or adjust This design brings together all system parameters from detector thresholds and high voltage settings to count mode selection in a single powerful user interface U navoidably this also creates a situation in which a single incorrect keyboard entry can change the operation of the entire instrument In order to prevent accidental changes it is strongly recommended that the high level system password be used only when it is necessary to change parameters T he low level
161. e is removed from its holder on the side of the instrument Theory of Operation The modified modular detector board SP28B is connected to the clicker board by the cable YP 11534522 T SP28B provides unregulated 10 12 V dc power and ground to the clicker board T he signal that drivesthe clicker circuit provided by the M D B is fed to the input of integrated circuit A1 Al provides pulses of constant width and timing regardless of the duration or spacing of its inputs T he pulses are applied to the transistors Q 1 and Q2 The outputs of Q 1 and Q2 connected to the primary sideof thetransformer T 1 T hetwo pulses generated by A1 act in a push pull fashion to increase the voltage swing across the primary side of thetransformer T hetransformer steps up this voltage and then applies the voltage across the speakers SK 1 and SK 2 T he volumes of the speakers outputs are adjusted by potentiometer R 4 Clicker Board 2 units with serial numbers 101 through 171 if equipped with the Configuration hand probe option are furnished with the original clicker PC BA YP11532000 PCM 2 units with serial numbers 172 and subsequent are equipped with the revised clicker PCBA YP11585000 T he original clicker board can be easily distinguished from the revised counterpart by its speaker arrangement T he original board included two piezoelectric sounders and a transformer the new revised board has no transformer and uses only one speaker
162. e unit s internal electronics enclosures D ust accumulations can result in noise problems or high voltage power supply arcing It is therefore important that the eectronics enclosure LCD enclosure and ceiling cover panels be replaced and securely fastened after servicing or system setup Replacethe P 10 counting gas supply when the supply cylinder s pressureis unable to provide at least 5 psi at the regulated low pressure output If the instrument is supported with an optional gas bottle enclosure routine gas pressure checks can be made by viewing the pressure gages on the supply cylinders through the enclosure s clear Lexan window A singlesize 1A 1 54 ft gas cylinder will support a standard PCM 2 instrument in good condition i e no punctured detectors and with a normal operational gas flow rate for approximately 32 days at a nominal gas flow rate of 200 cc min The same instrument equipped with an optional gas manager will consume only approximately 10 20 of the counting gas of a standard continuously flowing system thereby operating for approximately 160 days on a Size 1A cylinder at the same 200 cc min nominal gas flow rate T he gas supply plumbing harness for the instrument incorporates an in line filter for gross particulate and moisture removal from the gas prior to entering the detectors Although this filter located in the lower electronics enclosure is not likely to become clogged in normal usage it should be replaced if gas
163. eader wiring larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 8 Polyethylene D ispenser This option incorporates a thin M ylar amp or polyethylene film supply and take up roll system into the PCM 2 s baseto providethe user with a simple and easily accessable method of protecting the unit s foot detector from the frequent contamination caused by users shoes T he system has been designed to manually advance the thin film sheet over the foot detector and onto a blank take up roll where the contaminated particles are trapped between film layers to later be discarded along with the used protective film sheet Theremaining blank supply roll coreis used asthetake up roll when a new supply roll is installed T he film is manually advanced by inserting a hexagonal shaft driver into the take up roll shaft center hex screw through a Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features small hole in the front of the PCM 2 s base and rotating thetake up roll 2 to 3 complete clockwise turns A storage clip for the hex driver is located inside the PCM 2 s side door As noted two choices of protective film media are available with this option T he polyethylene material is 0 0005 thick T heM ylar amp material is 0 00016 thick and istherefore better suited for alpha radiation monitoring Both materials are furnished on cardboard cores in 200 ft lengths T his option offers the user a greater degree of foot detector m
164. eavy metal grid in front of it and it may also be shielded by plastic film installed to protect it from dirt T hese factors combineto makethis the least sensitive detector in the PCM 2 particularly for alpha radiation In order to detect a specific amount of contamination basic physics dictates that this detector will require a longer count time To determine which detectors are the limiting factors select the D etector Performance screen from the D ata menu T his display sorts detectors by performance with the worst at the head of the list If the problem detectors are significantly worse than the rest it may be worth for example increasing RD Asin exchange for shorter count times Attempting to balance all of the detectors to equal backgrounds or efficiencies is not required or recommended computations are performed independently for each detector to obtain maximum sensitivity in the shortest possible count time Excessive changes to individual detector parameters usually results in unnecessary complication with little or no real change in performance D etectors that are not causing significant problems should be left alone Individual detectors may be adjusted through the D etector P arameter screen under the Edit menu Remember that any subsequent entries made through the System Parameter or O verride Parameter screens will overwrite the changes made to individual detectors The need to modify detector parameters is most frequent
165. ectors T his option includes three standard spare detectors one of each size which are mounted internally to the unit on its rear door T he detectors are plumbed in parallel via gas supply and gas exhaust plumbing harnesses which flow the instrument s normal exhaust gas through them so that they continuously purge during normal instrument operation T his configuration provides the user with the capability of easy and immediate replacement of any damaged or otherwise failed detector without impacting the instrument s normal operation Repair or replacement of the damaged detectors can then be pursued without incurring instrument downtime T able 19 21 lists the items incorporated in the spare purging detectors and contains parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 21 Spare Purging Detectors Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No _ PartName Description Part No 010 11534 D542 Detector Assembly Long 3 Channel 11534560 020 11534 D542 Detector Assembly M edium 1 YP11534561 Channel 030 11534 D542 Detector Assembly Small 1 Channel 11534562 040 11534 D542 M ounting Bracket Spare Probe 7211534540 050 11534 0542 Velcro Cinching Strap Probe Retaining 25 060 11534 D542 Strap Loop 2 Wide HDHA27 070 11534 D542 1 4 Tubing Blue PVC MMTU62 080 11534 D542 Quick Discount 1 4 Hose Barb FGPL33 Coupling 090 11534 D542 Hose T 1 4 Hose Barbs 2 100 11534 D542 Ty wrap Clamp A
166. ent are provided Theinstrument will select one gas source upon powerup and continueto use that source until its pressure fails at which timethe alternate gas source will automatically be selected via internal gas switching electronics If both inputs drop below approximately 2 psi the instrument will ceaseto operate A If portable cylinders are used to supply counting gas each must be regulated down to approximately 5 psi and connected to one of the gas inputs T he standard PCM 2 unit includes one gas bottle pressure regulator located in the extraneous parts box as noted above see U npacking on page 2 1 If the optional gas bottle enclosure PT 9 Gas Bottle Enclosure page 19 53 isordered one additional gas pressure regulator is included 11 two counting gas sources are installed it is important that both regulators be set to the same pressure so that gas flow will remain constant when the second cylinder is selected If the pressureat either input fails a message will be displayed on the LCD panel indicating that the gas cylinder needs to be replaced W hen theinstrument is operated from a permanently installed counting gas manifold both inputs may be connected to the same 5 psi source T his will eliminate false as Bottle Empty messages T wo flow meters are provided along with a single needle valve to adjust the gas flow rate For normal operation usethe low range meter to set a flow rate of approximately 200 c
167. er identics swipe card reader assembly larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 OPT 7F Barcode R eader This code reader option for the PCM 2 utilizes a compact programmable Intermec 2861 scanner decoder module which uses high speed spinning mirrors and sweeping laser beams to receive reflected light as analog waveforms from bar code labels which are then decoded and sent to the user as ASCII data T iming and focus can be tuned to discern a variety of bar code widths Interfacing with the PCM 2 is accomplished through an AD P RS232 interface module Thelntermec 2861 barcode reader features the following performance characteristics and code reading capabilities Power On LED Status Light Good Read LED Status Light Scanning D istance 2 10 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features Scanning W idth 1 5 9 75 in Scanning Speed 200 scans per sec Code D ensity 0 19 mm 0 0075 in to 1 27 mm 0 050 in Code D iscrimination Code 39 C odabar 2 of 5 U PC EAN and Code 128 he scanner module mounts in the upper electronics enclosure of the PCM 2 behind the console panel s display panel power supply mounts in the lower electronics enclosure on the lower vent panel and the AD P 232 interface module mountsto the floppy disk drive cover plate in the upper electronics enclosure T he custom badge insert interface panel is mounted in the display panel beneath the CRT Note
168. er unig Hee Jom Mut zr hewr in Deol ruse to misi Weiss ee MOUNT teewinhed mit ba anb btr the Pond as stow Kieler h deve 1 16014 04078 Oem Wes ut aires 2 Sat 18 Que Zaquriico caregor marty Hahr omh of eire xcom coro ree bee reisisid fe TON Z Gre omire iss or the rer tne Deor Chee m Hmmm la vive the qae o men bo comet poetis fev ay sh 0 dor moim oi aha sarng M Figure 19 16 11534 480 Access control overall assembly drawing 2 of 3 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features 1534524 Optimal Strass Sena N d Coble rot 2 req d 50091006 Dreq SCYTDO 0 ee sec ater 2 for notes ae T 2911532441 Pond i 5 au gei t D mee tid Upper facial Sg P e MZH Hie from POM 2 anit Lendu Rowing Calling Assembly Figure 19 17 11534 480 Access control overall assembly drawing 3 of 3 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 35 Options Optional Features ICI Insert Card Reader 19 36 PCM 2 Technical M anual
169. es in directory APCM 2 to afloppy disk in drive A enter the string C APCM 2 for the source string and A or for the destination string TheD elete Files utility allows the user to delete files without exiting the PCM 2 program T he user is prompted to enter the name of the files to be deleted wildcards are allowed in the string If the file does not exist the user will be notified to press the Escape key If a filename string of is entered you will be asked if you really want to delete all the files in that directory If Y es is selected all thefiles in the specified directory will be deleted if N o is selected no files will be deleted Note Exercise care when deleting files T he following files should never be deleted 2 EXE HIMEM SYS PCM2 0VR TRIP CHR AUTOEXEC BAT COMMAND COM CONFIG SYS EGAVGA BGI Any file with the extension G Control of the main computer is returned to the disk operating system Access to DOS is provided for maintenance of the system hardware and software 2 Technical M anual 8 3 Utilities Exit to DOS BLANK PAGE 8 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Preventative Maintenance Routine Maintenance Thermo Electron Corporation Chaptero Maintenance ThePCM 2 instrument should be kept clean and dry D ust should not be allowed to accumulate on printed circuit boards or other electrical components within th
170. es or seals below 0 05 the M ylar amp will not be adequately inflated and air will diffuse into the chambers more rapidly A starting system pressure of 0 25 is recommended for the PCM 2 In a parallel plumbed system maximum detector efficiency is typically obtained at a flow rate of approximately 10 cc min per detector chamber At 6 cc min per detector chamber a very slight decrease in efficiency may be observed however operation will still be very satisfactory D epending upon the size and number of leaks present many detectors will operate wel down to even 4 cc min chamber N ote that PCM 2 has three different sizes of detectors and that these are average values N ote also that new detectors may require slightly higher flow rates to remove organic vapors released by internal materials Thermo Electron Corporation Operating Instructions Thermo Electron Corporation Options Optional Features T he absolute minimum useful flow rate any given system must be determined by experiment and may therefore not be achieved in practice It is quite easy however to operate instruments on only 15 20 of the gas which would be consumed without the gas manager T his equates to a gas usage rate of approximately one size 1 P 10 gas cylinder every 160 days for the PCM 2 unit under continuous normal operation at a system inlet pressure of 5 psi and flow rate of approximately 150 cc min W hen operating normally the gas manager displ
171. et 14 Pin DIP SOIC114 XA5 90 11543 005 Socket 08 Pin DIP SOIC308 C1 100 11543 5 Capacitor 10 uF 16V 100M 4X C2 3 21 110 11543 005 Capacitor 33 pF Ceramic CPCE330P3P C4 8 11 120 11543 005 Capacitor 0 1 uF 50V CPCE104P3N C12 16 20 130 11543 005 Capacitor 0 01 uF 3000V CPCE103P4Y C13 140 11543 005 Capacitor 0 047 uF 4000V CPPF503PXY C14 150 11543 005 Capacitor 220 pF 3000V CPCE221P3Y C15 160 11543 005 Capacitor 0 001 yF 3000V CPCE102P3Y C17 170 11543 005 Capacitor 0 01 uF 80V CPPF103P30 C18 180 11543 005 Capacitor 0 27 uF 50V 2 C5 7 19 190 11543 005 Capacitor 33 yF 10V CPXX12 R1 5 200 11543 005 Resistor 10K Ohm 1 4W 596 RECC103B22 R6 220 11543 005 Resistor 220 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC221B22 R7 11 230 11543 005 Resistor 10M Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC106B22 R8 240 11543 005 Resistor 1M Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC105B22 R9 250 11543 005 Resistor 270 Ohm 1 4W 5 RECC271B22 R10 370 11543 005 Potentiometer 100K Ohm trim PTCE104B83 1 260 11543 005 Transformer High Voltage TFHV5 CR1 270 11543 005 LED T 1 Red superbright OPLP57 CR2 4 280 11543 005 Rectifier High Voltage CRSIVA0025 CR5 290 11543 005 Diode Small signal CRSI1N4148 01 3 300 11543 005 Transistor N Channel FET N2N 7000 Q2 11543 005 Transistor PNP medium power 2 4234 X1 30 11543 5 Crystal 7 3728 M Hz CY0S12 J1 330 11543 005 Header 12 Pin x 0 156 COM R612 13 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Modular Detector Board M odular De
172. eu 9 sjequunu pe 2Ji2u3 Sd t 26pm OUI 4 fpoeu 1uno3 as SALON Jojniounuuy 9105 1X3 104009 559225 ZWOd d4 gc abpa soupy pey oun apo Wg 2 9 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 5 2 W 2521 4291 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy JuUBUOdWOD 100 67511 89 22 4 wos posut GS 22 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 OUWAYL eui no JOJeINUNUUe JOW junou e LES PESTI ep ec fq peppod 99 mp E 2 ad BMPS 4 oum p de Lal 10 I 1 move ununow ATE NC sod p i awy e ar 91 96 2 enue Z Wd 4012104105 0112913 oway lt yoy 5 Aejad Aejap oe zz n lJ boltom durface af e xol clegrgece hate os show full scale ER ot st trin Eniry Furniture Gide Height Adjustment g 3 req d 530 ar R Ex Figure 22 51 11534 477 Access control base assembly 22 57 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation l orr ia he bm ambar gn POG PS md
173. f the electronics enclosure Each of these should be connected to a supply of P 10 gas 1096 methane 9096 argon at a regulated pressure of 5 psi Ensurethat both gas supplies are regulated to the same pressure so that flow rates will not change when the alternate source is selected If desired both inlets may be connected to the same gas source with aT fitting Adjust the gas control to obtain a flow of 800 cc minute as indicated by the second flow meter M aintain this ratefor about 4 hours minimum to ensure that the detectors are fully purged then decreaseflow rateto 200 cc minute as indicated by the first flow meter If the hand probe option is installed a third flow meter is provided purge this probe at 25 cc minute for 1 2 hours then decrease its flow to 5 10 cc minute for normal operation Note T he flow indication may require 2 to 3 minutes to stabilize D o not permit the flow rate to exceed 1000 cc min at any time A If a gas manager is installed see Gas M anagement on page 19 57 for gas adjustment instructions Thermo Electron Corporation Accessing the Computer Detector Voltage Thermo Electron Corporation Selection Installation Quick Start Instructions Either the front panel keypad or the main computer keyboard may be used to control the instrument however for calibration we suggest deploying the larger keyboard next to the LCD panel 1 access the computer s ain menu press Escape and type
174. faces including wireless to connect the PCM 2 to a host computer or a network Each of these options is supplied with the required hardware including cables and with specific installation information As with the power cord these cables may exit through either power inlet plate i e at the top of the unit or at the lower rear corner of the cabinet After the instrument is properly installed and purged with counting gas configuration with the correct operating parameters must be performed before it can be placed in service Configuration is soft set through the T est mode edit routines via keyboard input T he configuration routines and the parameters of interest include the following minimum parameters Edit D etector Parameters Edit O verride Parameters Note D etector parameters can be set for individual detectors using the Edit D etector Parameters routine Edit O verride Parameters is used to set the same parameters for all 34 detectors globally T his is particularly useful for setting the high voltage operating points for all 34 detector channels A D etector high voltage and efficiencies should be determined by calibration routines before being set The PCM 2 isfully calibrated at the factory which is located at an elevation of 6 480 ft Different counting gas densities exist at other elevations If the instrument is installed at a different elevation it will be necessary to replateau to determine the correct high voltage setting
175. foot detector in the base of the unit can be considerably less depending on the spacing of detector s face away from the bottom of the foot of the user the open area of the footplate which has been provided with the unit and thethickness of any protective polyethylene or M ylar amp film used on the detector A Each of thethree sizes of detector assemblies has been designed for internal attachments of anode wires as close as possibleto the detector chamber walls T his design feature minimizes the insensitive regions which commonly exist at the sides or ends of detectors of thistype and reduces the overall dead area of the entire instrument when the detectors are placed closely together as in the PCM 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 1 Detectors Design Configuration Design Configuration 16 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Another design feature of the PCM 2 detectors is a chamber faceplate that presses onto the detector pan and secures the M ylar amp window to the detector without screws A silicone rubber gasket provides the gas seal between the inner pan and M ylar amp window faceplate Reusable quick release clips mount the faceplate to the detector body T his design using gaskets and no screws also eliminates any face mounting flanges so that separation between adjacent detectors is further minimized and allows for quick and easy rebuilding of detectors with damaged M ylar amp windows without the need for any disposable assemb
176. frame assembly 1 of 2 22 79 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation OES 1 Encirclaed membere rafer line tame BOM 2 2 Hrs cuter is line on BOM 2 09712 3 insert 1 Lobe Boripe pe 11834 0106 a 414 Lat Frome into Weimar Align imd secure ehe Fera Trim Ih Bas Lowe Electronica Enclosure Argembly 11534 D318 ref Baek Yaw Right View Figure 22 73 11534 316 M ain frame assembly 2 of 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual 22 80 Thermo Electron Corporation ses sheet 2 for notes gt o m E 2 gt a B g D E To E t hy a a ag 29 BD 2 rc aw 2 ea os 2 lt an i F gt L 585 25 Sz u 22 81 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 22 74 11534 321 Detectors installation assembly 1 of 2 Thermo Electron Corporation 1 Redes te HOM FCW BASK 2 r to ond ar rei Cinch Stropa 534 at Arm Detector retained ker 346 Bose weldment fA keyhole siat set pr fock geertw 405 ae Blond Aamermbty shown Remove end rip from Pale Detector pim lo rioting mts Isigid Porel slop culcwt pinching Pan Deiectnr and ads the Thigh amd Shoulder Detac
177. g is deemed acceptable makes the PCM 2 easier to operate Setting this value to Y es informs the instrument that an access control unit is present and must be controlled T hesefields permit the entry of new four digit values for the two test modes passwords Current values are not shown Thermo Electron Corporation Day File Logging Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Day File Logging Transaction records source check results and status changes can be stored in daily disk files day files if the user so desires T his storage is enabled using the three menu items under the D ay File D irectory Storage heading the Instrument Configuration edit screen T he information is stored as follows D ayFileD irectorAD IRYYM M DD YY TXT T ransaction record day file for day MM DD YY D ayFileD irectory DIRYY MMDDYY SCK Source check results day file for day MM DD YY D ayFileD IRYYWM M DDYY CHG Status change day file for day MM DD YY M M represents the month 01 12 DD represents the day 01 31 and YY represents the year 00 99 in which the information was stored T hese files are stored in directory 10 ayFileD irectory DIRYY where isthe year the information was stored The files are created when the first transaction source check report or status change is written to a day file Subsequent transactions source check reports and status changes occurring on the same day are appended to the same file
178. gh Count Rates and Long Counting Intervals W hen 20 or more background counts are expected per count cycle the Gaussian distribution function can be invoked with acceptable results In terms of count rate background will be annotated with the symbol representing a count rate and B signifying background T he data must be first standardized then normalized to the function as follows 2 Technical M anual 15 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions Because the function is standardized i e centered about zero so average background is subtracted from the data so as to reference to zero instead of average background T hus the alarm set point is expressed as a net count rate or count rate above background Regardless of the level of Rg it is normalized or scaled to the G aussian function by its standard deviation Because T able A 2 operates on F standard deviation the entire distribution of Rg isknown in terms of its F An alarm setpoint would then be selected as being an appropriate number of F abovethe average background count rate for a given false alarm rate An appropriate name for the constant that would multiply F is sigma factor BF Equation 35 illustrates how simply the alarm setpoint is selected where Racmin Symbolizes the net count rate on which to alarm N ote that the alarm set point is expressed as a minimum since lower count rates would result in higher false alarm
179. gration expressed as a percentage D etectors which show background levels above these limits are considered too noisy or contaminated to use and will remove the instrument from Service D etectors with backgrounds below these levels are assumed to have failed Theinstrument will not count if this occurs T his parameter controls the speed with which the computed average background rates will follow changesin actual background count rates T he weight factors smooth statistical fluctuations in background measurements by synthesizing an exponential moving average Increasing the weighting factor will enhance the smoothing function at the expense of extending the time constant associated with recognizing step changes in the real average background count rate T heformula for computing the weighted average background count rate is _ Raa XWF WF 1 where the new computed average background count rate Roig the previous computed average background count rate WF weight factor and Rhew the most recently measured real background count rate measured in a single count interval W hen the instrument is occupied some detectors may be shielded from local radiation sources that account for part of the observed background T he shield factor is defined as background while occupied divided by background while unoccupied 2 Technical M anual 5 9 Edit Minimum Count Time M ode Note Alpha channel shield
180. ground update count differs from the computed average background rate by this many standard deviations the new rate will immediately replacethe old If the detectors on which this occurs alarmed on the last measurement they are assumed to be contaminated A sum zone is a user defined group of two to four detectors that are grouped together to enhance the monitor s ability to detect contamination spread over an area shared by several adjacent detectors T he alpha beta sum zone alarm set point defines the activity required within the sum zone area before a sum zone alarm istriggered Refer to the upcoming section or sum zone setup for more information on sum zones A sum channel is a sum zone consisting of every channe in the monitor T healpha or beta sum channel alarm se point isthe activity which must be present within the entire monitor before the sum channel alarm is triggered Whenever the above parameters are changed the following dependent values are recalculated and displayed Count Time The measurement count time required at present background rates T his is the longest count time calculated for any detector channel Thermo Electron Corporation High Voltage Geometry Factor Alpha amp Beta Channels Active Alpha Threshold Beta Threshold Alpha amp Beta Efficiencies Alpha amp Beta RDAs Alpha amp Beta High Fail Alpha amp Beta Low Fail Alpha amp Beta Weight Factors Thermo Electron Corporation
181. gure No Head amp shoulders switch assembly 11534 548 22 19 and 22 80 ICI insert card reader assembly 11534 323 22 59 ICI swipe card reader assembly 11534 324 22 60 Instructional label assemblies 11534 106 22 27 Instrument outline 11534 555 22 1 Intermec barcode reader assembly 11534 378 22 63 Intermec barcode reader wiring 11534 386 22 64 Island assembly 11534 317 22 24 and 22 25 Keyboard pivot plate assembly 11534 333 22 35 Keypad and backplate assembly 11534 304 22 26 Lower electronics enclosure assembly 11534 318 22 69 Main frame assembly 11534 316 22 72 and 22 73 M odular detector board 11543 001 22 8 M odular detector board components 11543 005 22 9 M odular detector board hybrid 11534 008 22 10 Overall assembly access control 11534 480 22 16 22 77 and 22 78 Plumbing 11534 371 22 87 Plumbing configuration 11534 308 22 31and 22 32 Polyethylene dispenser assembly 11534 320 22 38 and 22 39 Power cable single board PC 11534 740 22 85 Power cable VEIN92 11534 739 22 84 Printer assembly 11534 312 22 46 Rear and side door assembly 11534 330 22 70 and 22 71 Rear hand detector panel assembly 11534 322 22 23 Remote annunciator 11549 002 22 88 Remote annunciator assembly 11534 529 22 47 Remote annunciator component assembly 11549 001 22 48 Revised detector assembly long 11534 560 22 14 and 22 15 Revised detector assembly medium 11534 561 22 16 and 22 17 Revised detector assembly small 11534 562 22 18 and 22 19 Right left foot switch assembly
182. he PCM 2 s gas supply plumbing harness 15 outfitted with 0 005 diam orifices at the inlet of each detector and becausethe quick purge line does not include an orifice system counting gas effectively bypasses the unit s detectors when the quick purge line isin use T his arrangement allows a maintenance technician to quickly purge any singular detector in the unit or on a nearby bench with fresh counting gas without disrupting any other plumbing fittings or tubing and without introducing any ambient air into the detectors counting gas supply lines U sage of this quick purge feature is as simple as unplugging the gas supply linefitting from the subject detector and plugging in the quick purge line s fitting which immediately causes gas to flow through the detector into the System gas exhaust plumbing harness at the rate prescribed by the PCM 2 s flow meters Note Exercise care when setting the gas supply adjustments Excessive gas pressures or gas flow rates can causethe purging detector s fragile M ylar face to burst If possible visually monitor the rate and degree of detector face swelling during the purging operation so asto avoid detector damage A W hen the detector is adequately purged as determined by the gas pressure and flow rate removethe quick purge line and reinstall the normal gas supply harness line in its place Since the fitting at the end of the quick purge line is self sealing like the others on the PC M 2 system count
183. he first counting position as depicted on position display number one T his requiresthe user to face into the detectors and look to the right toward the active position display If feet hands or body are not in close contact with the instrument red arrows are 2 Technical M anual 3 1 Operation Computer Interface 3 2 Computer Interface 2 Technical M anual illuminated showing which position switches are not being activated T he unit will also issue these prompts verbally if equipped with the optional voice annunciator the user is correctly positioned counting begins A clock on the position display panel counts down the seconds remaining until counting is complete If the user moves out of position before the measurement is finished the clock is stopped until a satisfactory position is again assumed If mid cycle results are enabled an instrument setup option contamination detected in the first counting position will be displayed at this time T he Alarm Acknowledge key Alarm Ack must be pressed to resume operation if alarms are displayed Position display number two is then active and the user is instructed to enter the second counting position As shown on the position display this requires facing out from the detectors and again lookingto theright toward the active position display panel As before red arrows on the position display panel indicate open position sensors T his second count cycl
184. he host provides one port per instrument RS 232 levels are normally used If multiple instruments are connected in party line network it is necessary to use RS 485 levels H ost communications are supported through connector P3 on the SP24 board a 9 pin female D connector In the RS 232 configuration IC A27 provides serial data output on pin 3 of this connector and receives input data on pin 2 out is present on pin 4 and D SR in is present on pin 6 W hen the SP24 is configured for RS 485 IC A29 is used 1 isthe positivel O lineand pin 9 is negative Connector pin 5 is ground Reconfiguration convert an RS 232 board to RS 485 remove the IC from location A27 Procedure and install an RS 485 transceiver chip in the socket at A29 T he preferred chip for this application is T hermo Electron P N ICCM A485 Converting an RS 485 board to RS 232 isthe opposite removelC A29 and install T hermo Electron P N ICXXM AX2323 at A27 CAUTION D o not simultaneously install A27 and A29 A Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 11 9 Host Communications Port Configuration T able 11 1 lists the items incorporated in the front panel board and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 11 1 Front Panel Board Electronic Parts List Ref Desig Drawing No Part Name Description PartNo Al 11526 D03 IC Micropro
185. hi Squared Distribution Function 2 Technical M anual TheChi squared distribution function is applied post facto to counting experiments to evaluate goodness of fit of the data to a theoretical distribution Stated otherwise observed results are compared to expected theoretical results and a determination is made as to whether or not the difference is reasonable A poor fit would suggest instrument malfunction indicated by spurious counts C hi squared is calculated as indicated by Equation 32 Eq 32 2 _ 1 _ 2 x x Cisi where Xe the experimental mean or average value of the counts collected in N measurements N the number of counting intervals involved and x the count data collected in the it counting interval Asthe number counting intervals that are evaluated increases the goodness of fit is expected to improve T herefore to be useful the Chi squared value must be considered along with the number of data points T he parameter P2 lt known as Reduced Chi squared is used to enter a plot such as Figure 5 or atable such as T able A 3 of Chi squared values T he value is 1 or the number of degrees of freedom in the experiment Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions Chi squared Distribution m o
186. his display Count rates are shown in the units Selected in the instrument parameters menu which is either counts per second cps or counts per minute cpm Pressing the F2 key enables or disables geometry correction of background data W hen correction is applied the raw count data is multiplied by a detector geometry correction factor T his permits easy comparisons of count rates from detectors of differing sizes T he user may view the current day files for transactions status changes and source check results D ay files are explained in detail in D ay File Logging on page 5 19 2 Technical M anual 4 1 View Detector Performance Data Detector Performance D epending upon system operating mode this screen shows either count Data imesorRDA values calculated for each detector channel at the present background levels and operating parameters T he display is sorted from highest worst to lowest best to provide a quick assessment of the range of values and to identify which detectors are most likely to cause problems if background levels increase Hand Probe Readings Stored background and current real time count rates are shown for the optional hand frisking probe if installed Background data is accumulated whenever the probe is in its holder ne count rates are therefore displayed only when the probe isin use T hehand probe alarm set points for the alpha and beta channels are also displayed Gross Count Rates The las
187. his document is intended to be primarily a how to discussion that the reader will refer to as an application guide As with any statistical population or sample the two parameters that provide a reference point and a scale for observations and analysis are the mean or average and the deviation which is frequently referred to as sigma deriving that name from the lower case G reek letter used symbolically as a shorthand reference to standard deviation T hesetwo parameters when applied to raw counts of radiological events are quite simply determined G enerally one is interested in the mean number of counts observed post facto or expected implying future countsto be collected in a specified counting interval T he mean can be determined from the results of a single measurement as well as the average of multiple measurements provided that the effect of differing counting intervals if 2 Technical M anual 1 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Basic M easurement Parameters Complex M easurements A 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual used is properly accounted for If a simple mean number of counts is known the theoretical standard deviation is merely the square root of the mean where N represents the mean Equation 1 GN Eq 1 With the mean and standard deviation known or predictable for a set of measurements the variation or deviation of measurements from the mean is likewise kn
188. ia its O ut port In the Sound Card Voice Annunciator O ption the voice annunciator board YP 11513000 is not used instead a new sound card which suppliesthe required sound interface is mounted in the onboard computer see Figure 19 3 N ew autoexec bat and config sys files are loaded Software for the sound card resides in a new subdirectory IBM II on the root directory 19 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Sound Card Voice Annunciator Thermo Electron Corporation Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator OPT 2A Sound Card Voice Annunciator This option includes a PC sound card sound card software and a cable assembly with audio speaker T he voice annunciator speaks phrases which prompt the user for proper body positioning for measurement announce monitor status and prompt data input requirements T he sound card voice annunciator uses standard wave files that are easily created on any Windows computer with a sound card and microphone T hisallowsthe user to create custom messages or to provide voice prompting in any language W ave files with standard PCM 2 messages in English are provided with this option T he sound card is mounted in an expansion slot on the PCM 2 PC mother board and its audio speaker mounts adjacent to the PC speaker in a bracket in the ceiling of the unit See Figure 19 3 ThePCM 2 software plays wave files stored on the disk For example when someone steps into the PCM 2 and d
189. ical M anual 7 7 Calibration Calibration Report BLANK PAGE 7 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Detector Dow nload Front Panel Test Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 8 Utilities PCM 2 VERSION V 1 9 View Edit Status Calibration Utilities Detector Download Front Panel Test Communications Check Voice Annun Test Remote Annun Test Badge Reader Test Access Gate Check Set PCM 2 Clock Edit Colors Transfer Files Delete Files eXitto DOS If oneor more modular detector boards M D Bs are installed or replaced whilethe PCM 2 isoperating they must be initialized with high voltage and detector threshold values T his utility provides a meansto download parameters to one or more detector boards without resetting the entire instrument T hefront panel board of the PCM 2 provides an interface between the main computer and the instrument s various sensors and indicators If the unit is connected to host computer this board also buffers test results until the host accepts them T his status screen may be used to test the operation of the front panel keypad all of the switches used to detect a user s body position and the two gas pressure sensors 2 Technical M anual 8 1 Utilities Communications Check 8 2 Communications Check Voice Annunciator Test Remote Annunciator Test Badge Reader Test Access Gate Check Set Clock Edit Colors
190. iencies Alpha amp Beta RDAs Alpha amp Beta High Fail Alpha amp Beta Low Fail Alpha amp Beta Weight Factors Beta Shield Factor Alpha amp Beta Backgrounds Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Preset All M ode T hefraction of particles expressed as a percentage emitted by the source of interest in all directions that are counted by the detector Contamination of these activity levels is detected with a probability equal to the system RD A confidence level Channels which show background levels above these limits will be considered too noisy or contaminated to use and will removethe instrument from service Channels with backgrounds below these levels are assumed to have failed T heinstrument will not operate if this occurs T hese parameters control the speed with which the computed average background rates follow changes in actual background count rates T he weight factors smooth statistical fluctuations in background measurements by synthesizing an exponential moving average Increasing the weighting factor will enhance the smoothing function at the expense of extending the time constant associated with recognizing step changes in the real average background count rate T heformula for computing the weighted average background count rate 15 _ XWE R pow WF 1 bkg where Rpxg the new computed average background count rate oig the previous computed average background count rate
191. igher voltage potential is required Required Equipment In order to perform this checkout calibrated sources of alpha and beta radiation are required T hese to be large 100 cm sources T he alpha source is to be Am and the beta source isto be C 137 Select an alpha source with 1 5 2 5 times the activity of the beta source Note T he sources used at the end use facility should be representative of the isotopes to be monitored digital voltmeter with probe 100 cm alpha and beta sources e Inspection mirror e Formatted 3 floppy Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual B 1 Procedures Setup B 2 Setup Electrical Power Counting Gas Supply PCM 2 Technical M anual 1 Verify that the instrument is configured appropriately for local line voltage If thereis any question remove the lower electronics enclosure cover and verify the switch setting on the computer power supply T he inspection mirror is required for this check Using theohms section of the voltmeter check for any shorts between 12 V and ground Turn on the instrument and verify that the PCM 2 main display is displayed on the LCD within 3 4 minutes Set up the computer configuration in OS memory as follows Drive A 231 1 44 M floppy Primary M aster Auto 61 952 kB Extended M emory Num Lock off Usingthe digital voltmeter verify that the 12 V power supply is between 11 5 and 12
192. ing gas will once again flow normally and equally through the gas supply harness and metering orifices into all of the detectors Thermo Electron Corporation Maintenance Troubleshooting Troubleshooti Thefollowing subsections list some of the problems that may occur with the PCM 2 and presents probable causes High Low Sensitivity Fail With every background update a detector sensitivity analysis is performed on each A sensitivity failure is posted when detector s sensitivity falls outside of defined limits of sensitivity T he analysis is performed as follows Detector average background count rates are normalized to a reference detector size by applying that detector s geometry factor For example a small detector s geometry factor will be greater than 1 Its background count rate is scaled up by its geometry factor so that the corrected count rate can be compared to all other detector channel on an equal count rate unit area basis Thecorrected background count rates of all active detectors are averaged to provide a reference count rate for comparison Separate averages are computed for the alpha and beta channels A tolerance band is established about the mean count rates computed in the previous steps T he tolerance band upper limit is determined by dividing the average count rate by the alpha or beta sensitivity factor the sensitivity factors are less than 1 The lower limit of the tolerance band
193. ion of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 7 Detectors Maintenance sem eet md Gis 12 L Meier t tem om 1751534548 1 per oun nm Probe per 1042025 Cuz pier amd Leck Procedure 1 me M m n 2 57 E 1 oan U 040 T 1 MT use T Da pesh Wire E 2 1 H PN 3j es 5 E rf Ta vw gan Figure 16 3 11534 561 Revised detector assembly medium drawing 1 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation 16 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Detectors Maintenance Figure 16 4 11534 561 Revised detector assembly medium drawing 2 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 9 Detectors Maintenance see Sheet 2 for notes ond other mmm T HN 72727222727722720 722 PIPPI II m ow o o RO OC ESLER OO 2 Pic s ot N eoch Wire End ISSA Pic s See 7 7 Figure 16 5 11534 562 Revised detector assembly small drawing 1 of 2 16
194. ional M ylar amp film dispenser roll is also available for the same protection and cleaning purposes offering PCM 2 Technical M anual 16 3 Detectors M aintenance 16 4 Replacement Special Considerations Rebuilding PCM 2 Technical M anual an even greater degree of convenience for foot detector servicing Replacement film rolls and cardboard film protectors are available see chapters 20 21 and 22 Theremaining detectors in the instrument are each protected by a thin etched stainless steel screen T hese screens serve to prevent detector face punctures potentially caused by physical user interface with the detector panels i e sharp or protruding clothing pens pencils badges jewelry etc If any detector becomes punctured or otherwise damaged to the point of failure it can easily be removed and replaced with a spare detector ThePCM 2 has been designed for quick and easy removal and replacement of its detectors Velcro cinch straps retain the detectors in their respective panels in the instrument and quick connect self sealing fittings attach their gas plumbing harnesses T herefore no tools are required for detector removal and installation A spare purged air evacuated P 10 gas filled probe can thereby replace a damaged detector in minutes preventing lengthy instrument downtime while a detector is repaired An optional set of spare continuously purging internally mounted detectors is available to support su
195. is connected to two gas plumbing harnesses manifolds a red gas supply harness and a blue gas exhaust harness For faster purging because the counting gas is heavier than air the supply hose should always connect to the lowermost gas fittings of vertically mounted detectors If the H and Probe option PT 1 and Probe on page 19 1 is installed a third gas flow meter and a separate rate adjustment needle valve provided T his single handheld detector will operate adequately on 5 10 cc minute of P10 counting gas regardless of whether gas manager is present or not For units equipped with Spare Purging D etectors O PT 15 Spare Purging D etectors on page 19 66 you do not need to apply special gas flow rate adjustment considerations because these spare detectors are provided with exhaust gas downstream from the main detectors and are ready to be placed into use without additional purging For units equipped with a 6 as anager O PT 12 Gas anagement on page 19 57 refer to Chapter 19 ptions for detailed system adjustment direction because operation of the gas supply exhaust system is Significantly different from that of a standard unit Power is brought into the PCM 2 via a four outlet power strip Into this strip are plugged power cords from the unit s lower electronics enclosure and options such asa printer or badge reader T heline cord attached to this power strip may exit the unit either th
196. is derived by multiplying the average count rates by the appropriate sensitivity factors Detector channels whose corrected average background count rate falls within thetolerance band are considered to be normal If a detector s alpha or beta average background count rate exceeds the upper limit of the tolerance band that detector is flagged with aH i Sensitivity Failure A Low Sensitivity Failure occurs whenever a detector channel falls below the lower limit T he environment that a PCM 2 operates in can cause sensitivity failures even though all detectors can be operating properly For that reason the first recommended step isto analyze the geometry factors and sensitivity factors and make changes to those parameters as necessary Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 9 5 Maintenance Troubleshooting 9 6 High Voltage Fail 2 Technical M anual Default geometry factors are set in inverse proportion to the detectors area using detector 30 s area as the benchmark Factors other than a detector s size can contribute to its count rate e g a streaming background or a shield that affects only part of the instrument If changing geometry factors is warranted observe the background averages in the V iew menu ensurethat the C orrection is toggled off and assess relative values of count ratesto establish appropriate geometry factor values G eometry factors are edited on the D etector Parameter screen under
197. iscrimination the 34 discrete channels 75 sum zones and sum channel provide a total of 220 measurements per count cycle Since a person is measured with two count cycles there are 440 independent measurements performed per person T he sum channel is thereby capable of detecting low level widely distributed contamination Individual detector channels within the PCM 2 are independently controlled by distributed microprocessors In addition a Pentium class based single board computer and a large 10 4 LCD pane provide a user friendly interface for the system T his enhanced controller also simplifies calibration and maintenance of the unit and presents test results to the user in a clear and easily understood graphic format A full size keyboard is stored insidethe unit for use during setup calibration and troubleshooting T he PCM 2 is also capable of logging measurement data in any of several formats to a printer or host computer system using RadN et broadcasts over an Ethernet network ThePCM 2 features a functionally ergonomic design that maximizes user body contact with and minimizes dead areas between the detectors A color VGA LCD panel isused to display information during normal operation as well as during setup calibration and maintenance If contamination is detected during a measurement cycle a color graphic image is presented to indicate contamination locations T he image is one of a user s body outline placed in front of the
198. iscussion of this parameter Thetime in seconds for which all channels of the PCM 2 will count Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Preset All M ode Sigma Factor multiplier of the background count rate standard deviation that influences the false alarm rate See Appendix C Sigma Factor and RDA Calculators Background Sigma Factor If a background update count differs from the stored average background rate by the standard deviation value entered the new rate immediately replaces the old If the detectors on which this occurs alarmed on the last measurement they are assumed to be contaminated Alpha amp Beta Sum Zone sum zone is a user defined group of two to four detectors that are Alarm grouped together to enhance the monitor s ability to detect contamination Spread over an area shared by several adjacent detectors T he alpha or beta sum zone alarm set point defines the activity required within the sum zone area before a sum zone alarm istriggered See Alpha amp Beta Sum Zone Alarm on page 5 3 Alpha amp Beta Sum Zone Alarm on page 5 7 and Sum Zone Setup on page 5 21 for information about sum zones Alpha amp Beta Sum Channel sum channe is a sum zone consisting of every channel in the monitor Alarm Thealphaor beta sum channel alarm set point is the activity that must be present within the entire monitor beforethe sum channel alarm istriggered W henever the above parameters are changed the fol
199. jaubd uol 2 402104105 uo1pe 3 ouJeu L A qwasse e3ejdxoeq pue ped ay YOE PESTI 92 72 7 au a mr Tg mz ess 7 ajou das TET W 2214291 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 oway sel quiesse 948 jeuononisu 90T PEGTT 22 22 enia aod you dA jp qa 921 Kui unu 0 2949 BRAUNU jonbepo Ne J BOnjM S apu qy c2300JOMWHDST ETT W 2214291 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 oway ssausey Ajddns seo 69 vESTT 82 22 aunbi4 xL Mi xmmoq nani pub 5 WD np Sabie Mi 03 090 Ap uj ROR pum Vous G QC SMOD DEA ime 600 ue sou i 2 1999 PORAB wb pem auy E RUDY SEY ABAD Unlppzcjst ti Kb Dui mc Aat auos WA 69961484 THOS 120 dep i Re su 95 49415 SII rp B AQ 8 y ew s Hd s 23 a st B 191 19967 B H td 91 doe 497 mm 24994 19971 omc wD 10991 dasu WBS 7 0912 ym poo uj Bk 010
200. l unit testing and checkout at T hermo Electron s Santa Fe N ew M exico manufacturing facility The M D Bshavean upper operating voltage limit of 1750 V dc and the PCM 2 software does not allow the user to set operating voltages above this high limit a feature that prevents detector high voltage arcing failure potential due to over volting at sea level CAUTION T he potential for over volting exists at altitudes above sea level Thegeneral rulefor adjusting the M D B soperating voltage isto increase it by 30 V dc for each 1000 ft of elevation decrease below the initial 6480 ft set up elevation Santa Fe T o avoid this destructive over voltage arcing potential users should try to minimizetheir M D B operating voltagesto the extent possible A O nce a high voltage discharge arc path is established in a detector a minute amount of carbon is deposited at the point of discharge on the detector chamber T his carbon deposit then becomes a point of decreased resistance in the probe chamber for subsequent arc potential If arcing is allowed to continue by further over volting the detector additional carbon deposits will occur due to arcing and the detector s performance will begin to deteriorate at an increasing rate Thermo Electron Corporation Calibration Special Considerations Source Plateau for Detector 17 574 a threshlod 45mV B threshold 5mV 517 By in fly CH 459 source 1638 DPS Am source 1472 DPS 5
201. le and its power supply are located on the upper section of the PCM 2 Verify that the cables are connected properly If the LED ison at the scanner then scan the reset bar code see ote on page 44 to set the scanner to factory defaults If there was a response then set up the scanner according to the listed barcode inputs If there 15 no responseor if the LED isoff change out the scanner system with known good components W hen the system is repaired reassemble and restart the PCM 2 T able 19 14 lists the items incorporated in the ICI swipe card reader and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 14 ICI Swipe Card Reader Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 030 11534 B706 Scanner Card Reader VEM 189 040 11534 B706 Interface M odule Scanner interface VEMI88A 020 11534 B706 Cable Assembly Interface to Front Panel 11534705 cable 090 11534 B706 Extension Cord AC Extension Cord WRAC20 11534 B706 Scanner Interface cable Adapter Cable VECA93 11534 B706 Power Supply Wall Plug Power Supply 1349 11534 B706 Power Tap in place of VEM 1349 Power Tap Used YP11534707 instead of VEM 1349 010 11534 706 Computer Identics Card Reader M tg Plate ZP11534263 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 45 Options Optional Features Barcode Reader 19 46 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 19 22 11534 706 Comput
202. levels 2 By paging through the background plateau graphs it is possible to identify any detectors with unusual response characteristics or arcing problems 3 T he voltage range over which source plateaus must be run may be narrowed to a small region around the point at which alpha background counts begin to climb sharply T he user may scan the background plateau for each detector using a vertical cursor line Asthe cursor is moved information below the graph is updated T heinformation displayed includes the high voltage setting and the alpha and beta counts at that setting T heoperator may select the high voltage for the displayed detector by pressing F2 while the cursor is positioned on the voltage desired T he operator may also select high voltage via the override parameter or detector parameter edit displays T he background plateau data can be displayed as actual data or normalized data relativeto the largest data point If the hand probe option is installed and the hand probe board is communicating properly a background plateau may be obtained for the hand probe detector as well Pressing F5 in the Select D etectors screen toggles the selection of the hand probe detector If the hand probe option is installed but the board is not communicating a message will appear in the Select D etectors screen informing the user that the hand probe is not communicating Pressing F5 when choosing to view plateau data also selects the hand p
203. lowing dependent values are recalculated and displayed Alpha amp Beta RDA Lower At the current background count rates these limits are the lowest RDA Limits values which are attainable using the specified count time and statistical parameters False Alarm Rate percentage of users who will see false alarms given the current set of parameters Min Count Time T he shortest count time that can be used to detect the specified RD A at present background levels Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 3 Edit Preset All M ode 5 4 Detector Parameters High Voltage Geometry Factor Alpha amp Beta Channels Active Alpha Threshold Beta Threshold 2 Technical M anual D etector parameters are normally set via the O verride Parameters screen Values entered from that screen are written to all detectors any entries made previously to a single detector are lost Parameters for a single channel are examined or adjusted through the D etector Parameters screen by using the arrow keys to select the desired detector Detector 0 Parameters Preset All M ode HI GH VOLTAGE VOLTS 1600 GEOMETRY FACTOR 1 00 Alpha Channel Beta Channel ACTI VE Yes ACTI VE Yes THRESHOLD MAX 45 THRESHOLD MAX 5 EFFICIENCY 90 22 0 EFFICIENCY 90 22 0 RDA DPS 16 1 RDA DPS 83 3 FALL CPS 100000 FAIL CPS 100000 LO FAIL CPS 0 00 LO FAIL CPS 0
204. ltage If you want to set all other detectors to the same high voltage usethe O verride Edit display As with background plateau data source plateau data can also be displayed as actual or normalized data T he alpha and beta source plateaus are normalized for each source type the two curves that result from the beta source are normalized to the maximum value in that data T he curves generated by the alpha source are normalized in an analogous fashion T hus all four curves are displayed in comparable scale a feature that is especially useful if the alpha and beta sources differ greatly in activity level If the hand probe option is installed and the hand probe board is communicating properly a source plateau may be obtained for the hand probe detector as well Pressing F5 in the Select D etectors screen toggles the selection of the hand probe detector If the hand probe option is installed but the board is not communicating a message will appear in the Select D etectors screen informing the user that the hand probe is not communicating Pressing F5 when choosing to view plateau data also selects the hand probe detector Plateau data is viewable even when the hand probe board has a communication failure 2 Technical M anual 7 3 Calibration Special Considerations 74 Special Considerations 2 Technical M anual The modular detector boards M D B operating voltages have been preset at 1550 V dc during the initia
205. ly materials such as double sticky tape A rugged plated steel screen with 6696 open area protects each detector in the standard PCM 2 unit with the exception of the bottom foot detector ptional thin high sensitivity etched 0 010 thick stainless steel 83 open area detector screens are also available T hese optional screens being physically thinner and having a 2096 greater open area provide proportionate decrease in typical measurement count times and are thereby recommended for use in monitoring environments where maximum sensitivity such as alpha measurement is desired The bottom foot detector rests on height adjustable brackets beneath a rugged stainless steel slotted base plate with 74 open area Because this standard slotted base plate design maximizes open area of detection it supports users with relatively broad and flat soled shoes only An optional perforated grid stainless steel base plate with 1 4 diam holes 5896 open area is available in support of users with high heeled shoes See Chapter 19 ptions for more detailed information on these and other options PCM 2 detector assemblies have undergone design revision sincethe instrument first went into production T he original detector design was based on a universal internal anode wire support system requiring individual dielectric standoffs and soldered wire supports T his design although quite functional when built and tested has proven to be pr
206. ly motivated by a detector which demands excessive count times due to high background or low efficiency T he most direct approach to this problem isto raise the RD levels for that particular detector accepting lower sensitivity in exchange for more practical count times T his assumes that administrative policy does not preclude such changes If both alpha and beta backgrounds for one detector are elevated another useful tactic is to reduce that detector s operating voltage by 10 20 V If beta counts are normal but alphas are too high the alpha threshold level Thermo Electron Corporation Gas Flow Adjustment Living With Radon Thermo Electron Corporation Installation Quick Start Instructions may be increased by as much as 1096 which will move some of the excess alpha counts into the beta channel Increasing the beta threshold will similarly cause some very low energy particles and extraneous noise to be completely ignored Large changes to these parameters will also impact detector efficiency and may therefore be somewhat self defeating C hanges to threshold settings should be accompanied by a replateau of the affected detector n rare instances a detector with acceptable counting performance may trigger sensitivity failures due to high or low backgrounds T his is normally caused by the presence of radiation or shielding which affects one detector more than the others If moving or reorienting the unit is not acceptable
207. m adjacent detectors however these may be deleted or changed to meet Site specific requirements Sum zone activity is checked and results displayed along with single detector results D istributed contamination which does not trigger an alarm on any one detector may still be sensed if it spans two or more detectors within a single sum zone Note Sum zones may overlap O ne detector may belong to several zones A PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 21 Edit Sum Zone Setup BLANK PAGE 5 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Overall Monitor Status Detector Status Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 6 Status PCM 2 VERSION V1 9 View Edit Status Calibration Utilities Overall M onitor Status Detector Status Log File Problems such as low gas pressure high backgrounds and communication failures within the instrument are described in this display T he Status drop down menu should be the first step in any attempt to troubleshoot the PCM 2 T he operator may press the F2 key while in this display to clear the transaction buffer W hen the Store T ransactions variable in the instrument configuration screen is set to Yes all measurement results are saved in the non volatile memory of the unit s front panel board If this data is not collected by a host computer the buffer will eventually overflow and the PCM 2 will be removed from service T his condition will be corrected if a hos
208. ma 7 tr wet 6 ns isa opg apsa dao junaye VLCC W 2214291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy TZ 40 T Aiqwasse Jabeue W seo gpe peaTT 49 n d HD 079 Wey uo Jeyweuucs Dj 40 39uuo2 y WO pitur OL 5 so Durjnj un poyoop jopay Kimmy d nuy ene UO pae munssexd yo Zd PED p Boy 1184 7G 9180 8510 AjquuPssy mag pens fxjan ORO 290 pog O pound Win g 204244 Bung INC 4315 pm 42 wm woes 34 3 Uoga xui K T uma sen eo Ocg weu jo Y HERE 009 Wal pod 340 MiB 9 as pod uedo ib usec Wo 1678 o1 sen moy pours ne 4 aou E OY uy Oro uw aao 2229 PAmme od 059 ian Mq T i Te 30 Buien pousos QZ aep jo pod cju OBS wm 7 vn Way 7 9 Pasay sad 2 ul Qs SIN JIG PAA NAN pto PUD gajou e ayou 295
209. min flow U sers have reported up to a factor of 10 reduction in gas usage using the PCM 2 Gas M anager see 12 Gas M anagement on page 19 57 Theory of Operation Radioactive emissions cause ionization of the counting gas in the detector chambers T he ions are collected at the detector anode wire causing small voltage pulses on top of the static high voltage that is applied to the anode wire T hrough capacitive coupling the pulses are stripped from the high voltage amplified and discriminated by pulse height into alpha and beta gamma channels T he detector microprocessors count the pulses and convert the counts to count rates Count rate information is communicated to the system controller over an RS 485 bus T he system controller applies the appropriate algorithms to update background count rates and measure for contamination Operational Mode In its main task loop the computer program continually updates background count rates for all detector channels performs diagnostic checks and monitors input devices to determine if a person will be measured N umerous O devices are used to prompt the user and verify correct positioning for a contamination measurement T he results of the measurement are annunciated audibly and visually T he measurement is principally a qualitative determination an alarm indicates a high probability that the person is contaminated no alarm indicates a high probability of no contamination presen
210. minates when the access control unit is in an emergency gate lock override status T he alarm beacon is mounted atop the access control unit on the upper cover pane providing maximum visibility to H ealth Safety personne that may be monitoring the System nearby T his option is recommended for customers who intend to operate multiple PCM 2s with access control adjacent to one another in the same area so as to provide the capability of instant visual identification of a single alarmed unit T his option can be easily retrofitted to any access control unit in the field M arked with the familiar Pull in C ase of Fire lettering and equipped with key lock reset this remote switch is intended for installation in a guard station where remote override of one or multiple exit gate locks is necessary in the event of fire or other emergency situations which require immediate personne egress T his option includes only the pull station switch itself which can beinterwired with any number of PCM 2s Since each facility will likely have its own unique wiring requirements for this remote switch no interconnecting cable is provided with the option T hermo Electron Customer Service and Engineering groups are available to provide design recommendations and services for installation and wiring of this safety related option PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 27 Options Optional Features Detector Parts List Table 19 8 liststhe electronic items incorporated in th
211. mounted face down on the board Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 3 Options Hand Probe Clicker Board Original Clicker Board Table 19 2 lists the items incorporated in the original clicker board and Parts List should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 2 Original Clicker Board Parts List Item Reference No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 010 11532 003 PC Board Clicker YP11532002 Al 11532 003 IC Dual onostable M ultivibrator ICHCA4538 1 4 11532 003 Capacitor 0 01 uF 50V 20 CPCE103P3N 1 11532 003 4 pin 0 10 COM R1104 01 3 11532 003 M OSFET N Channel N 2N 7000 R1 3 8 9 11532 003 Resistor 41K 5 RECC473B22 R4 11532 003 Potentiometer 2005 1 4W 10 PTCE201B03 R5 11532 003 Resistor 47S 5 RECC470B22 R6 7 11532 003 Resistor 470K 1 4W 5 RECC474B22 SK1 2 11532 003 Speaker Piezoelectric Sound Transducer ADSP6 1 11532 003 Transformer Primary 8 Figure 19 1 11532 003 Clicker Board components A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Clicker Board II Parts List Thermo Electron Corporation Options Hand Probe Clicker Board T able 19 3 lists the items incorporated in Clicker Board and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 3 Clicker Board II Parts List
212. nce voltage divider probe to measure the output voltage since the supply has an impedance of one megohm O peration of thetwo amplifier stages may be monitored at test points 5 and 6 respectively D C levels at both of these points should be between 0 5 and 1 5 V Alpha and beta one shot outputs are present on pins 2 and 3 of J2 If a pulse generator is connected to the detector input notethat the input impedance of the amplifier is low and may load the generator output significantly As mentioned above placing a jumper in position 6 will disablethe high voltage supply for technician safety Alpha and bea pulse height discriminator thresholds default to values of 45 and 4 8 respectively T hese levels may be changed via the detector parameter menu however this capability should be used only after careful evaluation T he M D B can be used with several types of radiation detectors its full adjustment range 15 not intended for any onetype Increasing the beta threshold will rapidly reduce detector response to low energy beta and gamma particles both from contamination sources and background T his will result in decreased beta gamma detection efficiency however background count rates may actually decrease faster than those from contamination T he default alpha threshold was selected to almost eliminate alpha counts dueto beta particles Lowering this value will increase alpha particle detection efficiency however false alpha channel
213. nd therefore the associated alarm setpoints it is possible to se R aqm iy equal to Rg m Ax T 11515 done in Equation 43 by equating the right hand sides of Equation 35 and Equation 36 and then solving for T Since any lesser value of T would violate the requirement that lt ax the MIN subscript is appended to T to indicate that it is in fact the minimum count time that can be used without sacrificing one of the constraining parameters of the measurement _ SE Ry z RDA x Eff Eq 43 MIN RDA x Eff Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual A 21 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions 2 Fixed Count Time Obviously using R aqm n for the alarm setpoint allows the instrument to operate as close to background as possible given the limitation of the count time selected Assuming that the count time is as long as reasonably allowed the sensitivity is maximized Referring to Figure A 9 it can be shown that at the lower alarm set point RD A has a greater probability of detection than would be determined by the maximum alarm setpoint T hus in fixed count time mode the user selected RD A becomes a maximum permissible RD A no less than the selected confidence level should apply to the selected RDA and at the confidence level selected lower RDA exists T his lower RDA is computed by Equation 44 R IRDA x Eff sr 2 RDA Eq 4
214. ndard bar codes and many non standard codes T he bar code reader provides a convenient means of entering aU ser ID number T hecard reader is a swipe reader in that it requires the user to pass a card with a bar code on it through the card guide T he recommended distance from the edge of the card to the center of the bar code strip is 3 8 0 375 T he recommended width of the bar code strip is 1 2 0 50 T heunit consists of an eectronics package mounted in the ceiling of the PCM 2 and the reader itself is mounted in the lower cutout of the console panel s display beneath the CRT ThePCM 2 requires a scanner with a RS 232 interface 9600 baud no parity eight data bits one stop bit and a carriage return terminator T he scanner s interface has been setup per the following instructions It will supply the proper RS 232 interface and the required codes for the bar code card If the defaults were changed then use the Reset bar code found in the separate manual provided with the instrument The scanner has been assembled according to 11534 7006 T he following setup and test were donefor this type of scanner scanner VEM 189 has been connected to its cable V ECA93 which is then connected to the interface module s V EM 188A port A The interface module s other cable YP 11534705 has been connected to its RS 232 M port T he other end will be on the front panel s SP28B port P2 he interface module has the po
215. nders either adjacent to a PCM 2 unit or at a remote location It features a clear Plexiglas window in the locking door for monitoring the gas regulators gages at a glance internal bottle securing brackets straps a wall mounting bracket with quick release pin for DOT securing requirements and easy detachability and hardware and paint finish which match that of the PCM 2 instrument O ne additional two stage gas bottle pressure regulator is also furnished with the option See Figure 19 27 for unit dimensions PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 53 Options Optional Features Gas Bottle Enclosure Parts List 19 54 PCM 2 Technical M anual T able 19 17 lists the items incorporated in the gas bottle enclosure and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 17 Gas Bottle Enclosure Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 040 11534D236 Window Clear Lexan ZP11534240 070 11534D236 Wall Bracket Enclosure ZP11534243 Stabilization 080 11534D236 Rubber Grommet 7 8 x 11 8 MMRU37 082 11534D236 Rubber Bumper 3 8 x 1 16 thick M M RU90 090 11534D236 Hinge Door 1115 100 115340236 Cylinder Holder P10 Gas 148 110 115340236 Furniture Glide Enclosure 112 120 115340236 Flush Latch Door HDLA16 196 11534D236 Hose Barb 1 4 MPTx1 8Barb 51 Brass 200 11534D236 Quick Release Pin Wall Bracket HDM 1166 210 11534D236 Gas Regulator 2 Stage P10 PUHD38
216. ng a directory path for day file logging See Day File Logging on page 5 19 for more information If a printer is connected to the PCM 2 this setting determines the set of character and control codes used T he printer typeisonly important when printing graphics such as high voltage plateaus Theinstrument is removed from service to update background information after the specified number of measurement cycles If there is time between users to obtain background counts this forced update will not be required Entering 0 disablesthis function Setting this field to Yes forces the PCM 2 to update its background counts after every measurement that results in an alarm T his detects contamination left on the detectors T ransactions Enables disables storage of transactions in a day fileif desired Alarms only may be stored by selecting Alarms Status C hanges Enables disables storage of status changes in a day file Source Check Results Enables disables storage of source check results in a day file See D ay File Logging on page 5 19 for more information A Y es value causes the PCM 2 to display contamination detected during the first measurement cycle o requires users to complete both measurements before any results are displayed Any of the four standard Body and optional Shoulder Position switches H and H ip L Foot or R Foot may bedisabled D isabling these switches when less precise body positionin
217. ng any disk files print a calibration report for the PCM 2 to preserve the current parameters If the wrong files are accidentally deleted this will avoid the need to completely recalibrate the unit force a return to the factory default parameters it is necessary to delete the modified files from disk Select the Exit to D O S function from the U tilities menu to stop the PCM 2 s program and obtain accessto D O S the disk operating system T ype the command D elete xx dat followed by pressing Enter where is one of the following file names PCM 2575 This data file contains instrument and system parameters user set passwords etc D eleting this file will cause all defaults to be reinstated including those in the following files PCM 2DET Contains the detector parameters PCM2ZONE_ Contains the sum zone definitions PCM 2M ESG Contains the default banner line messages the desired files have been deleted press C tri Alt D el to reboot the instrument W hen the program offers to assign defaults or use the last set of values select the defaults O nce this has been done it is necessary to completely recalibrate the PC M 2 or key in the correct values since all efficiencies voltages and other parameters will have been reset Thermo Electron Corporation Installation Quick Start Instructions If the user defined high level system password is ever lost another computer may be used to delete the dat
218. nnel the high voltage circuit of that M D B islikely to be malfunctioning H igh voltage failures are commonly caused by a broken anode wirein the detector that is short circuited to ground Before replacing the M D B usea continuity meter to test the anode to ground conductance If a conductive path exists rewire or replace the detector prior to attaching a new M DB to that detector Refer to Chapter 13 M odular D etector Board for more information on M D Bs and detectors Thermo Electron Corporation Comm Fail High Background Fail High amp Low Count Fail Thermo Electron Corporation Maintenance Troubleshooting Note W henever an M DB isreplaced the D etector D ownload routine must be invoked to restore the correct parameters to the affected detector A Communications failures can frequently be overcome by forcing communications to be re established through the D etector D ownload routine under the U tility menu If this does not correct the problem inspect the connection of the wiring harness to the affected M DB If the connection is secure the failure is likely to be a faulty R S 485 transceiver IC on the M DB Replacing the M D B is the fastest way to put the instrument back into service Note W henever an M DB isreplaced the D etector D ownload routine must be invoked to restore the correct parameters to the affected detector A A high background failure is most often caused by improper setup of the instrument If
219. o PU AEG ces pESE monde Sis 7 p 101004405 said 2 ONDIS 502005045 9 28 lt HDOURNOS 1942018 PHY HDL yer Zorte J ytd Z Z Alquiasse Joop apis pue Jay Oce pesTT TL ZZ aed WOLNA 624499 Dorn ENIGH gt doj woog tulum ble Butt PERDOE Po mud mue v VER ery opg 0300 uogope cq coud eyg 12445 OOH s20jj any d pas dug cq o ap dg am j 1001 OO kaii sug aaa AMD bb pue primb Pub peii eO ibo Mere de um 7 I 72 i 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L amp e c 9 z HN e 59 M 9099 PT W ou a i aen en Encore medie vale Aesmnby 11534 eri 689 ias Reor Detector NO 52 G29 4L 708 29 lt gt y s T i oun E 7 is 1 8 2 pics Assembly per 115340315 ra par 11334 08 Rim Back view Figs Sight Figure 22 72 11534 3106 M ain
220. oblematic from a mass production assembly standpoint It has therefore been replaced by a more readily producible design requiring fewer internal components and assembly considerations Both detector assembly configurations feature identical detection capabilities and performances and are indistinguishable in their fully assembled conditions Identification of these original and revised detector assemblies is possible by PCM 2 unit serialization as shown in T able 16 1 below Thermo Electron Corporation Maintenance Thermo Electron Corporation Cleaning Protection Detectors Maintenance Table 16 1 Detector Configuration Detector Part No Detector Description 2 Serial No YP11534245 Detector Assembly Long Serial nos 001 YP11534246 Detector Assembly M edium through 150 YP11534247 Detector Assembly Small YP11534560 Revised Detector Assembly Long Serial nos 151 YP11534561 Revised Detector Assembly M edium and subsequent YP11534562 Revised Detector Assembly Small W hilein normal usein typical monitoring environments gas proportional detectors such asthose used in PCM 2 requirelittle maintenance other than keeping them reasonably clean and supplied with counting gas A detector With a clean contaminate free M ylar amp window will experience reduced background and will therefore have a greater sensitivity to measured radiation within a given count time Since minimization of count times
221. oes not begin entering an ID number within 5 seconds the delay time can be adjusted the program will look for file named EN TERID W AV on the disk and play that file if it is located W ave files are stored in the same directory as the PC M 2 s program pcm2 exe T hisisthe PCM 2 subdirectory on the hard drivein most installations Selecting Voice Annunciator T est on the U tilities menu can test the sound card T histest cyclesthrough all the available wave files Pressing the F3 key on the Instrument Configuration Parameters menu also tests it by playing the Voice Annunciator is Active message ANN TEST WAV W ave files can be recorded and used to replace the wave files in the instrument Create the appropriate wave files using a Windows computer equipped with a sound card and microphone For best results usethe settings PCM 11 025 Hz 8 Bit and M ono when recording the wave files N ame the files as indicated below Replace the files on the hard disk drivein the PCM 2 using the D O S Copy command T his fileis not played during normal use and is convenient for testing new recordings T he sound card port can be selected and the voice speed can be set on the Instrument Configuration Parameters menu You may select ports 220 240 260 and 280 hex T he default setting 220 is unlikely to causea conflict with other hardware T he voice playback speed can be affected by settings used during recording and by processor speed
222. om will disintegrate within timet is expressed by Equation 22 1 Eq 22 W here 8 is the decay constant for the isotope of interest Since the half life of many common isotopes is very large when compared to typical count times p isusually much lessthan 1 T he Poisson distribution function is best applied where fewer than 20 counts occur in a single count cycle and is appropriate for many alpha radiation counters where background count rates of less than 10 counts per minute cpm are frequently encountered Efficiencies detector counts disintegration of such instruments can be low since alpha particles are rapidly attenuated in air Low efficiencies coupled with low levels of activity that are of regulatory concern result in the Lessthan 20 Counts rule of thumb being satisfied for the signal part of the measurement or counting exercise Note T he classical definition of measurement makes the term inappropriate for radiological instrumentation that count pulses H owever popular use of theterm deems its incorporation in this text as appropriate A T he basic function of the Poisson distribution is expressed in Equation 23 hn x Eq 23 where the probability that exactly x events will occur Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions x an integer and 8 the mean number of events that occurred or are expected to occur Popular c
223. onvention dictates use of the symbol 8 which is not to be confused with its use to symbolize decay constant asin Equation 22 x x x 1 x 2 x 3 1 0 is defines as equal to 1 Of greater interest than probabilities associated with discreet integers is a cumulative distribution a probability associated with x or more events In this text P is used to indicate a cumulative probability Equation 24 illustrates the cumulative distribution P x P x Le Eq 24 The Poisson distribution function is normalized i e the sum of all probabilities is exactly 1 Therefore anyone who would attempt the summation of Equation 24 would find relief in the identity of Equation 25 1 p 0 p 1 p 2 p x 1 Eq 25 Example A counter observes an average of 2 5 counts per interval The probability distribution for this mean value follows see eqs 26 to 28 Eq 26 2 5 0 p 0 52 0 082085 ET Eq 27 p l gt 0205212 2 5 2 0 0 256516 Eq 28 2 Technical anual 7 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions A convenient identity is p n p n Eq 29 The discrete and cumulative probability distribution is summarized in Table A 1 for values through x 10 Figure A 2 is a histogram that graphically illustrates the distribution described by 822 5 N ote that the histogram is skewed to the left T his is because the function s domain is
224. optional magnetic or bar code reader W hen this information is inputted it is appended to the date and time stamped transaction record for that measurement T he measurement results are stored on disk drivein the PCM 2 T hehard driveislarge enough to accommodate several years worth of measurement data Source check results and calibration reports are also stored on the hard drive ThePCM 2 isprovided with swiveling casters with immobilization levelers for improved mobility T his feature allows the unit to be moved easily by one person for service access In addition the following optional features are available Hand held frisking probefor finer localization of contamination e Voice prompting capability to enhance the user interface Printed reports of count results and calibration data e Remote alarm and status display module with wall mounting capability e Magnetic or barcode ID badge readers e Polyethylene film dispenser for foot detector protection and maintenance Modular gas bottle enclosure for two Size 1A counting gas cylinders Network cable and supporting network software for integration of the PCM 2 onto an RS 485 or Ethernet network Small hole perforated grid footplate for support of users with high heels PCM 2 Technical M anual 1 3 Introduction Specifications o Gasmanagement system for minimization of counting gas usage e Internally mounted continuously purging spare dete
225. or condition can only be flagged in the first background update interval following a personnel contamination measurement T wo conditions must exist before the condition will be flagged 1 the detector must post an alarm during the contamination measurement and 2 that detector s background count rate must be elevated above its previous average background by a factor determined by the background sigma factor When acontaminated detector condition is posted the possibility of a statistical anomaly causing the condition can be investigated by observing the background count rates in the View menu selection If high count rates exist the presence of contamination can be verified with an independent counter Short half life isotopes may be allowed to decay in situ or contamination can be removed using proper health physics procedures T he instrument can be restored to service by clearing the condition in the D etector Status screen of the Status menu selection Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 10 Hardw are Complement Sheet T his chapter provides a means of listing detailed information regarding each printed circuit board assembly PCBA configuration used in the PCM 2 and how each printed circuit board differs from its standardized base board configuration T his chapter also provides a convenient means of including additional configuration information in the event future of changes to these PC BAs Board configuration specifics incl
226. or panel assembly 22 28 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation 1422 enue W 6214291 Z Wd 402104105 29 4 oway L 7 40 T jquiesse puels T pEGTT EOIN 9909 wq mgd muy a 221540 cQ 27 paso bog mg ways BD pue MRUDI eA Dus wd xcu wq peu Z equas woy my Jaja Gagne pyang tey pus Ug IYIB Ap DU E 19946 est g MaeQ ss 0 cc W je91u429 Z WOd 401210105 uoJ9 3 oway TZ 40 c Aiqwasse pue s 82 2 14 XWW3SSY 43600 ONYISI e Li i i i 4 597 Oliva Pub Nid ucup pun jo oo ee TEC W 16514291 Z aunso 2u3 59404438 3 28990 jo cuo Apquiesso einue josul 62 0 a2ojins aue 24 1240 Burgqns pun UMOYE 50 usamjeq 210199224 a0 buoj y Aq AiqwassD o AD 43A0 LO UU Dg Ul uwous SO ajo dw2DQ pub 5 yo 22014 2 WO R uo sway sul oj 2342 SJION 1 0 21025 19190 Z 9 0u 205 Ja1 34519 30 Jas aojb nsu Old Paboq
227. ores on a mounting clip in the side door of the instrument Note T he swiveling casters are designed to provide mobility of the PCM 2 instrument over hard level and smooth surfaces only D ueto thelow clearance design of the leveler mechanisms usage of the casters for moving the unit over irregular soft or inclined surfaces is not recommended D amage to the caster s leveler mechanisms and the PCM 2 unit itself can occur if movement of the equipped unit is not limited to the approved surface types A T able 18 1 liststhe items incorporated in the swiveling casters and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 18 1 Swiveling Casters Parts List Item Ref No DrawingNo PartName Description Part No 010 11534 D340 Swiveling Caster Bracket Right Front ZP11534279 012 11534 0340 Swiveling Caster Bracket Left Front ZP11534368 020 11534 D340 Fixed Caster Bracket Rear 2 11534280 030 11534 0340 Glide Tube Leveler Actuator ZP11534276 040 11534 D340 Modified Glide Handle Leveler Actuator ZP11534278 050 11534 D340 Glide Cam Shaft Leveler Actuator ZP11534275 060 1153440340 Lift Ring Leveler Actuator 2 11534277 070 11534 D340 Glide Bracket Leveler Actuator 2 11534274 075 11534 D340 Spacer Leveler Actuator ZP11534532 PCM 2 Technical M anual 18 1 Swiveling Casters 077 11534 D340 Warning Label Caster Option ZP11534534 080 11534 0340 Swiveling Ca
228. oway L 102104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 7444 W 210429 Z Wd Z Z Ileus K quiasse Pasinay 9G pEGTT 61 22 einig Tupis PA Yo puo etre AAD 74 mo dpi eug Pao qn 159 Y 42600 pell FIFA B CY O0DIL 19d g TESTS 19 TmU GU O gunu pO 249U3 i RE CCC W 2214291 Z 24 401210105 uoJ9 3 oway Alquiasse YS 596 0 2 9Jnbi4 Meu fquasssy 911591263 52011583 MO Opes UO jo podus FILHO 2956 WOR suequinu 211501243 es way au 9 aja Sioquing 5214942813 29321 199 28242403 40 Xd SION pog imd 1v 2d o Figure 22 21 11534 315 Ceiling assembly 1 of 2 Thermo Electron Corporation 92 72 enue W 6214291 Z Wd LBG 3016 papou 02 0 25404 290 oput Sauru bugie K umop 891402 epos uo 381952 sway uy anses puo buye jo ep 58y WYO 2143021 puo jexpeds ejnos sojos woy fquiessb ay paanbas Atay pads tiuaurejjnba ya anod usus Aue 9170 75511 que Soy munii au uo 99 0 t 4340 jquusssy swoj ay uogzunBruo samod popune yubr junii 9208
229. own or predictable with application of the appropriate distribution function As will be seen later radiological measurements are rarely reported as merely thenumber of counts observed within a specific counting time interval T he values associated with the counts collected are usually manipulated algebraically so as to convert counts to count rates counts per unit time change units of measure to apply sophisticated averaging techniques to a sequence of measurements or to derive a value of interest from a complex relationship of variables as will be illustrated below Equation 2 is used to signify that a mean quantity Y is expressed asa function of n variables x Y Eq 2 Statistical theory provides us with a general formula for deriving the standard deviation of N asillustrated by equations 3 and 4 3 Eq 4 Example T o convert N counts collected in count time interval T to a count rate R the counts are divided by the count time Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Basic M easurement Parameters Eq 5 pet 1 Eq 6 _ 1 oy QN N Eq 7 Whereas isa constant the partial derivative of with respect to T is zero Note An important assumption is made here T he length of the counting time interval is assumed to be precisely controllable or measurable so that there is no associated uncertainty and it can be treated
230. ped status line is stored in NEWSTAT If and when the condition clears this is also noted in the file If NEWSTAT T XT becomesfull M AX 2200 entries its contents are transferred to OLD STAT T XT overwriting any older status information stored there After this transfer N EW STAT T XT is cleared and the status change that just occurred is stored there Incoming status changes are always stored in N EW STAT T XT which therefore always contains the most recent information Both files may be viewed and printed if desired by selecting the Status Log menu item Thermo Electron Corporation Overview Source Check Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter7 Calibration Adjustment of the unit s detectors high voltage setting beta threshold and alpha threshold are all computer controlled in the PCM 2 Computer control of these settings means that the technician can perform a complete electronic set up and calibration of the monitor through the computer keyboard and display without the use of a screwdriver or other tools Calibration and maintenance utilities provided by the embedded PC controller permit the technician to perform automatic detector plateaus view background count rates perform efficiency determinations perform beta alpha crossover analysis and generate calibration reports PCM 2 VERSION V 1 9 View Edit Status Calibration Utilities source Check Backgroun
231. play YP11534737 assembly 420 11534 D375 Floppy Disc Drive 14 M byte 178 422 11534 D375 Cable Dual Floppy Disc VEM 183 424 11534 D375 5232 5485 YP11451000 426 11534 D375 Power Supply PC AT 100W M EVE148 428 11534 D375 Keyboard PC AT VEIN47 529 11534 D375 Rubber Bumper Keyboard MMRU45 613 11534 D375 Switch Nut 3 8 32 Thin SCM N4 688 11534 D375 Lock washer 3 8 IT SS SCIT0037 110 11534 D502 Pressure Switch Counting Gas SWMI27 130 11534 D502 Solenoid Valve 12 VDC M EVE152 140 11534 D502 Diode Solenoid Valve CRSI1N4005 150 11534 D502 Hose Barb 10 32 x 1 8 ID FGBR57 Brass 160 11534 D502 Mounting Bracket Auto Switches ZP11171073 170 11534 D502 Strain Relief Hose Barb ZP11229057 230 11534 D502 Clear Tubing 1 8 x 1 4 PVC MMTUI 270 11534 08502 Cable Tie 1102 See Chapter 19 Options for specific optional card reader mounting plate part number information See Chapter 19 Options for optional high sensitivity etched detector screens part numbers Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 21 Recommended Spare Parts T able 21 1 is comprised of those spare parts recommended for one year support of from oneto five standard PCM 2 unitsin order to limit instrument down times dueto component failures T he quantities listed in thetable should be doubled for support of six to 14 units and tripled for support of 15 or moreunits Somefailed modules such as printed circ
232. pleted a new detector efficiency will be calculated and displayed on the M easured Efficiency line T he operator must press the F2 key to store the 7 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Shield Factors Statistical Variance Test False Alarm Test Calibration Report Thermo Electron Corporation Calibration Shield Factors new efficiency It is not automatically saved T he count cycle may be repeated by pressing Enter Efficiency values may also be directly edited via the detector parameter display If the hand probe option is installed and the hand probe board is communicating properly an efficiency test may be run for the hand probe detector as well Asfor the plateaus pressing F5 selects the hand probe detector and starts the test If the hand probe option is installed but not communicating a message will appear in the Select D etectors screen informing the user that the hand probe is not communicating T o view the test results press F5 to select the hand probe detector Efficiency data may be viewed even if the hand probe board has a communication failure T wo count cycles are initiated the first with the unit unoccupied and the second with a representative average size user in the counting position Shield factors are calculated for all detectors simultaneously and may be saved either individually or asa set Since the background count rates used to calculate shield factors are low we recommend using
233. poration Standard Parts List Item Ref Drawing Part Name Description Part No No No 512 11534 D316 Rubber Bumper 3 8 diameter x 1 16 MM RU90 531 11534 D316 Foam Adhesive Backed HDTA16 548 11534 D316 Conduit Cable Routing 1164 550 11534 03160 Conduit Cover Cable Routing 1165 604 11534 0316 Strain Relief Power Cord WRSR21 066 11534 0318 Mounting Bracket Power Supply 2P11534215 100 11534 D318 Vent Panel Lower Elec ZP11534228 Enclosure 108 11534 D318 Cover Corcom ZP11534264 148 11534 D318 Nut Strip Switch M ounting ZP10741018 302 11534 D318 Power Supply Low Voltage YP11534501 Assembly 304 11534 D318 Gas Control Switching amp YP11534502 Assembly Sensing 316 11534 D318 Upper Cable Hand Switch YP11534509 Assembly 330 11534 D318 Cable Power Inlet YP11534527 334 11534 D318 Power Strip 120 VAC M EVE63 336 11534 D318 Terminal Strip 2x6 COTB15 426 11534 D318 Power Supply PC AT 100 W att M EVE148 519 11534 0318 Caterpiller Vent Panel M M RU39 Grommet 543 11534 D318 Ty Wrap Clamp Adhesive Backed CL54 587 11534 D318 Cable Tie Ty W rap HDM 193 617 11534 D318 Foam Tape 1 2 W 3 16 thick HDTA25 010 11534 D321 Perforate High Heel Option YP11534175 Footplate 098 11534 D321 Enclosure Cover Lower Electronics 2911534225 118 11534 D321 Enclosure Cover Upper Electronics ZP11534226 120 11534 D321 Enclosure Cove
234. ports produced by the PCM 2 This utility function resets the clock to a time specified by the user The Edit Colors utility function permits changes to the display color schemes T his may be done as a matter of personal preference or to coordinate the PCM 2 s display with those of other instruments T he use of this screen is self explanatory Thermo Electron Corporation Mask User ID Transfer Files Delete Files Exitto DOS Thermo Electron Corporation Utilities M ask User ID Caution If the same color is ever used for both foreground and background on a single Edit Colors screen the information displayed will not be seen and the operator cannot edit the status colors i e those colors used to depict normal alarmed inactive or failed detectors A TheM ask User ID function is used to hide the person s ID number during the card reader input T his istypically used at facilities which usethe social security number as the person s ID number TheFileT ransfer utility allows the user to copy files without exiting the PCM 2 program T he user is prompted to enter a source file string and a destination file string wildcards are allowed in both strings If thefile already exists in the destination file directory the user will be prompted to chooseto overwritethe file or quit In addition if thereis not enough space on the destination drive an Insufficient D isk Space message will be posted For example to copy all the fil
235. presents the results in both tabular and graphical formats Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 1 9 Introduction Test M ode BLANK PAGE 1 10 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Unpacking Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter2 Installation ThePCM 2 is shipped upright packed with protective cardboard and bagged foam and is wrapped in plastic T hestandard shipping configuration also includes a cardboard extraneous parts box that resides on the floor of the unit T his box containsthe unit s P 10 counting gas bottle regulator lifting eyebolts sparetubing door and upper cover lock keys M S D O S and PCM 2 boot software disk and a copy of thistechnical manual For PCM 2s equipped with any options the associated optional hardwareis installed in theunit with the exceptions of the hand frisking probe printer remote annunciator and remote annunciator wall bracket options 1 3 4 and 14 respectively An additional box or boxes will be provided on the floor of or separately with the PCM 2 for units with these options Prior to removal of its shipment packaging the PCM 2 should be moved to the location of its ultimate use so asto avoid damaging its exterior surfaces in transporting As mentioned two large eyebolts are provided for overhead lifting of the unit T hese eyebolts install into threaded sockets located in the ceiling of the unit at the front right and rear left corners see Figure 1
236. probabilities H igher values are permissible since they would serve to reduce the false alarm rate Figure A 6 isa graphic interpretation of Equation 35 Rg Rai sr en Eq 35 T Figure A 6 Graphic interpretation of Equation 35 16 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions In Figure 6 the shaded area corresponds to the Gaussian cumulative distribution operating on SF mathematically equal to Equation 31 The distribution represents the probability that the background count rate will be less than R aqm jn 90 the false alarm rate is determined by Equation 36 where F SF is shorthand notation for the G aussian cumulative distribution function operating on SF Example In light of earlier comments the false alarm rate is controlled entirely by SF and is independent of If T able A 2 is invoked the independent variable x is substituted for SF If SF is equal to 3 09 the table indicates F SF is equal to 0 9989991 and p 1 F 52 0 0010009 Consistent with Equation 33 in the case of N channels or N measurements the overall false alarm probability is indicated by Equation 37 Eq 37 p 1 F SF 4 Because F SF is always less than 1 raising it to a power greater than 1 will reduce the value and increase the overall false alarm probability T his suggeststhat with an inc
237. put pins 14 and 15 of the microprocessor chip Four serial ports are available T he first which uses the C PU s internal UART is buffered to from RS 485 levels on pins 1 and 2 of P1 by T hese pins are connected to the PCM 2 s main internal data bus and provide communications between the front panel and main computer Three other serial ports are implemented by A15 A16 and A17 which are Intel 82510 communications controller chips All baud rates are generated from the microprocessor s crystal oscillator By installing appropriate interface driver receiver chips or jumpers each may be configured for either TTL or RS 232 levels and supports D SR DTR hand shaking ne of the three may also be configured as a second RS 485 port A15 is buffered by A26 to RS 232 levels on connector P2 T his port is used for the badge reader options and in addition to the serial data and handshaking lines includes two parallel inputs on pins 1 and 9 which may be jumpered low to indicate the presence and type of badge reader in use Power and ground for the reader are also provided By installing a set of jumpers in place of A26 this port may optionally be configured for TTL levels rather than RS 232 this is required by some readers A16 is buffered to and from RS 232 levels on connector by A28 T hisis currently sparel O port A17 is used for communications with a host computer via P3 and may be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 levels
238. r CRT ZP11534227 124 11534 D321 Perforated Grid Small Probe 2 11534567 1 8 square 125 11534 D321 Formed Perforated Palm Detector ZP11534573 Grid 1 8 square 126 11534 D321 Perforated Grid Ankle Probe ZP11534566 1 8 square 127 11534 D321 Formed Perforated Outer Hand Detector 2 11534579 Grid 1 8 square 128 11534 D321 Perforated Grid Long Probe ZP11534565 1 8 square 138 11534 D321 Foot Probe Poly Film ZP11534352 Protector 238 11534 D321 Slotted Footplate Standard YP11534328 240 11534 D321 Detector Long 3 Channel Assembly YP11534560 PCM 2 Technical M anual 20 3 Standard Parts List 20 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual 242 11534 D321 Detector M edium 1 Channel Assembly YP11534561 244 11534 D321 Detector Small 1 Channel Assembly YP11534562 246 11534 D321 Adjustable Foot Probe YP11534291 Supports 326 11534 D321 Cable 1 Detector YP11534523 328 11534 D321 2 Detector YP11534524 430 11534 D321 Modular Detector Probe Mounted SP28A Board Assembly 431 11534 D321 Foam Dust Shield M DB to Detector ZP11534578 432 11534 D321 Wave Washer M DB Grounding SCM W 59 534 11534 D321 Velcro Cinching Probe Retaining HDHA25 Strap 546 11534 D321 Handle Electronics Cover HDHA24 572 11534 03271 Fitting 1 4M PT x 1 8 Hose FGBR51 590 11534 D321 Key latch Upper Cover HDLA17 594 11534 D321 Pressure Counting Gas PUHD38
239. rage heading in the Instrument Configuration edit screen to the desired setting T ransactions All Alarms nly Status Changes N o Y es Source Check Results Y es Storage of transactions can be done for all transactions or only alarmed transactions T heseare stored in MM DDYY TXT Status changes are stored in MM DDYY CHG Source check results are stored in M M DDYY SCK ThePCM 2 supports the R adN et protocol RadN et allows the automated collection of data from different types of instruments from different manufacturers T ypically this ability is used with an Ethernet network Choiceis Enabled or D isabled Choiceis a number from 0 to 255 Sets thetime interval between broadcasts that the PC M 2 sends a message to statethat it is functioning properly Sets thetime interval between broadcasts that the PC M 2 sends a message to State that it is not functioning properly Note The PCM 2 sendsthe results of a measurement immediately after the measurement cycle is completed T he selection of thetransmission frequency does not affect this transmission A Enter a text string that is included with the et broadcast describing the PCM 2 Thermo Electron Corporation Sum Zone Setup Thermo Electron Corporation Edit Sum Zone Setup U p to 75 sum zones each containing two to four detectors are supported by the PCM 2 A default set of definitions is provided which creates zones fro
240. re also possible electrical adjustments that can be made PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 25 Options Access Control 19 26 PCM 2 Technical M anual T he access control electric circuitry includes a time delay relay that controls the duration that the exit gate remains unlocked and the entry gate remains locked after the PCM 2 has performed a successful clean measurement This relay has 16 possibletime delay ranges defined by switch settings that allow between 0 1 seconds to 120 minutes of time delay An additional rotary knob on thetop of the relay body allows adjustment between the minimum and maximum delay intervals within each possible setting Access control units are preset with a time delay of approximately 10 seconds by T hermo Electron during manufacture T his 10 second default interval has been determined to be effective for providing sufficient time to allow the user to exit theunit without allowing potential tail gating of other users behind the first It allows the exit gate to lock relatively quickly after the user has exited the unit Thetime delay can be adjusted by the customer to support the potential for specific exit gate unlock time intervals other than the noted factory setting Thetable of thetime delay intervals and the corresponding switch settings printed on the side of the relay module itself is shown in Figure 19 11 Power to the access control unit should be turned off prior to resetting the time delay relay
241. reasing number of channels larger sigma factors are required to maintain an acceptable false alarm rate Larger sigma factors decrease sensitivity as will be discussed later in this writing so some compromise is always in order T able A 2 can be used in inverse fashion by entering its field with p and extracting SF the more logical approach to using thetable Equation 38 expresses this technique mathematically where F isnotation for the inverse function of F SF Eq 38 T he process of invoking Equation 38 and entering T able A 2 with the results is greatly simplified by using the Sigma Factor N omograph illustrated by Figure 7 usethe nomograph extend a straight line 2 Technical M anual 17 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions A 18 Controlling Sensitivity 2 Technical M anual from thetick mark on theleft hand column that correspondsto the number of channels in usethrough the desired false alarm probability in the middle column until it intersectsthe right hand column T herequired sigma factor will be indicated In analogous fashion any of the three variables can become the dependent variable Figure A 7 Sigma factor nomograph Q ualitative counting exercises frequently seek to alarm with high reliability on some predetermined level of activity T he activity of interest is labelled rdiably detectable activity RD A In a detector channel the
242. ride trei B 4 eroi E CER REN B 4 Efficiencies and Shield ones to atro tos DER MEQUE B 5 Access Gate FEST etes B 6 Appendix C Sigma Factor and RDA Calculators nne C 1 Appendix D PCM 2 Revised Detector Assembly Procedure D 1 PIN CETOQ0A30B aia p irc i data n Ha D 1 Appendix 2 Detector High Voltage and Leak TestProcedure E 1 PEN sitos tied a tiu E 1 Thermo Electron Corporation General Description Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 1 Introduction TheEberline PCM 2 is a monitoring instrument that provides rapid and convenient detection and localization of alpha and beta gamma contamination on personnel Sixteen gas proportional detectors designed for rapid replacement or repair provide superior localization of contamination and background rejection A contoured array of 34 counting zones each with separate alpha and beta gamma channels provides data from which the instrument can determine the presence of both localized and distributed contamination In addition up to 75 sum zones can be defined each comprised of 2 3 or 4 adjacent detectors for a maximum detection of contamination that is spread over two or more detectors T he PCM 2 outline drawing is reproduced below in Figure 1 1 and also in Figure 22 1 in Chapter 22 D rawings sum channel is the summation of all 34 detectors into a single counting channel W ith and 5 Y d
243. robe detector Plateau data may be viewed even if the hand probe board has a communication failure Thermo Electron Corporation Source Plateau Thermo Electron Corporation Calibration Source Plateau determinethe optimum detector voltage for a particular altitude plateau one or more detectors with alpha and beta sources Setting all detectors to the same voltage usually obtains satisfactory performance however the PCM 2 also allows for individual settings W erecommend running source plateaus on at least two detectors to obtain reliable data If you use calibration sources with high activities it should not be necessary to subtract out background rates because they will be much lower For the best possible accuracy or if the sources used are of relatively low activities background information acquired with the background plateau routine may be subtracted from source plateaus In order to do this the background plateau must includethe voltage range of the source plateau and you must run it at the same voltage steps Source plateau graphs show four curves representing alpha and beta rates and crossover rates from alpha to beta and beta to alpha T o select the optimum high voltage setting for a detector while viewing its source plateau first move the cursor lineto that point where the beta as alpha counts begin to rise Select a high voltage setting just below that point move the cursor there and press F2 to save that high vo
244. rocessor s internal serial port TheM DB is normally connected to its detector by a banana plug on the detector body that plugs into a jack mounted on the circuit board Grounding is provided via the board s grounding jumper wire lug that directly contacts the back of the detector over the M D B mounting stud W hen used with a remote detector such as the PCM 2 s optional hand probe a coaxial cable assembly is terminated directly to the board Low voltage power and serial data enter through a twelve pin header J 1 at the front edge of the detector board Pins 1 2 and 12 of thisheader areDC ground a supply of 8 15 Vdc at approximately SOMA is required on pin 2 As configured for use in the PCM 2 pins4 and 5 are bidirectional serial data at RS 485 levels that are buffered to and from the processor chip by 5 Theremaining pins of J 1 jumpered to ground as necessary to define the network address of each board eliminating the need to manually set address switches when replacing a board because that information is wired into the chassis harness connector A four pin header J3 is used only when the M DB is part of the hand probe option T his connector contains power ground and signalsfor a clicker board used with the hand probe J2 is connected to the switch that enables clicking when the hand probe is removed from its holder PCM 2 Technical M anual 13 1 Modular Detector Board Circuit Description Circuit Description
245. rough the lower rear corner of the cabinet or through the top of the unit near its right hand side depending upon user need T he default configuration for power cord egress is through the lower rear power inlet plate While the PCM 2 is relatively immune to line noise and transients it is possible for very large power line spikes to interfere with the instrument Avoid connecting the PC M 2 to power circuits shared with large motors or other inductive loads If clean line power is not available a line conditioner Should be installed PCM 2 Technical M anual 2 3 Installation Other Optional Connections 2 4 Other Optional Connections Configuration PCM 2 Technical M anual To prevent unauthorized operation the unit s O n Off switch is placed on the right side of the electronics enclosure inside the unit behind the side door T hislocation is also the location of the fuse holder If the fuse must be replaced use a 3 Amp 1 25 x 0 25 inch slow blow fuse rated for 250 V T wo operating voltage ranges are supported 90 132 and 180 264 V M oving a recessed slide switch on the main computer power supply inside the lower electronics enclosure makes this selection An inspection mirror may be used to verify the position of this switch which is located between the two outlets on the right side of the power supply Thermo Electron offers as options a report printer a remote status and alarm indicator and a variety of data inter
246. rument servicing in the event of a detector becoming punctured or otherwise dysfunctional isto remove the subject detector and replace it with a spare purged detector of the same configuration T his approach renders the unit out of service for only the short time interval required for detector swapping enabling the maintenance technician to repair the damaged probe without further impacting the unit s operation See Chapter 16 D etectors and Appendix B Procedures for detailed instructions regarding PCM 2 detector assembly repair and servicing PCM 2 units are equipped with a quick purge line for the purpose of purging detectors quickly whenever the need arises T his feature is simply 14 ft length of 1 8 inner diam red PVC gassupply tubing which hasa sealing quick disconnect plug fitting at its end and joins with the gas supply plumbing harness at a T junction positioned approximately 6 downstream of theflow meters T he quick purge line is labeled and resides in back of the 2 Technical M anual 9 3 Maintenance Quick Purge Line 9 4 2 Technical M anual flow meter and gas manager brackets whereit normally hangsin a 10 diam coil A Velcro Rip T ie strap that is permanently attached to the line holds the coil up and out of the way for storage when the lineis not in use quick purge line coil is accessible through the back door and when uncoiled for use will reach any detector in the instrument Because t
247. s Optional Features NOES T ncrcied numbers refer jo ine on BOM PON2 COTM 2 Members in squores refar to fra items AOM PCUZ X Berne 12 Blank Picie sevisg ai herdacre to 010 Cord Raeder Phe Credit uruaed 17 tack mio rince urder 1153420505 4 Watol tem 020 Reofer Coble is bcotion shown and attoch to fotaled lecafos Front Panel Board P2 brown wire of the cobie goes 10 1 oe the board comecter irberior Lett Side Vow Ciectrorizs Enclosure Assembly Figure 19 21 11534 325 XICO insert card reader assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 41 Options Optional Features 19 22 XICO Insert Card Reader Parts List ICI Swipe Card Reader Scanner Basics PCM 2 Technical M anual T able 19 13 lists the items incorporated in the XICO insert card reader and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 13 XICO Insert Card Reader Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No PartName Description Part No 010 115340325 Mounting Plate XICO Card Reader ZP11534141 020 11534 D325 Cable Assembly Card Reader 11534514 030 11534 D325 Card Magnetic Bar Code VEM 169 Reader OPT 7D1 ICI Swipe Card Reader The Computer Identics is a high quality bar code reader capable of reading all sta
248. s dashpots have been uniquely adjusted to achieve consistent entry and exit gate return actions Some initial break in wearing of the gates axis bearings and return mechanism components is likely to occur within the first year of Operation which may necessitate subsequent readjustment of the air dashpots to maintain appropriate gate return rates and smooth gate closure actions If either dashpot requires adjustment first remove the upper cover panel from atop the PCM 2 T helarge cylindrical dashpot components are located directly above the gas return springs in the ceiling assembly of the access control module see Figure 19 13 T he dashpots are equipped with an adjustable orifice knob at the rear mounting bracket end of the cylinder that allows infinite adjustability within its dampening range T o adjust the degree of dampening simply rotate the adjustment knob slightly in the direction needed If more dampening is needed to keep the gate from Slamming shut rotate the adjustment knob clockwise If the gate is returning too slowly or is not fully closing against its magnetic lock strike rotate the adjustment knob counter clockwise A proper adjusted dashpot should dampen the return of a fully open and released gate and not take an excessive amount of time for the gate to close completely against the lock strike the PCM 2 cabinet T his is the extent of the mechanical adjustments that the access control unit may require H owever there a
249. s operating simultaneously the overall false alarm probability of false alarm for N measurements Py is defined by Equation 33 Eq 33 overall false alarm rate is established the false alarm rate individual channel or measurement is derived from Equation 33 as illustrated by Equation 34 Eq 34 poe ento hg 1 Low Count Rates and Short Counting Intervals Counting exercises whose product of count rate and count time result in 20 or less counts per interval average as stated earlier are appropriately modelled by the Poisson distribution function By using the numbers from the example on page A 7 T able A 1 can be invoked for an example of false alarm rate control that example 2 5 counts was the average expected number of counts per count interval If a false alarm rate of 0 001 or less 15 desired it is noted from T able A 1 that based on 8 2 5 P 10 20 000277 satisfies the requirement whereas P 9 0 00114 exceeds the maximum acceptable false alarm rate T hus an alarm setpoint of 10 counts per count time interval including background would be selected he total count rate on which to alarm is derived by dividing 10 counts by the length of the count time interval T he Poisson distribution function can be cumbersome to use because the p x and P x values are not directly obtained by a single calculation Rather chains of calculations or the use of alook up table are required 2 Hi
250. s the items incorporated in the voice annunciator and should Parts List contain all parts necessary for normal repair Table 19 4 Voice Annunciator Parts List Ref No Part Name Description Part No Sound Card Voice Annunciator VEBD52A PGM VEBD52A Sound Card Software PGM PCM 2VEBD52A 30 Cable Assembly Speaker and Cable YP11534645 19 12 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator 19 13 PCM 2 Technical M anual ROM PSAL AL NUMERO ANC UN OTD TECO 1 SN 24 i Xxx n 3 LII 2 3 SA nd el iw TEE l Figure 19 3 11513 002 Voice annunciator drawing 1 of 2 larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation Options Sound Card Voice Annunciator Figure 19 4 11513 002 Voice annunciator layout drawing 2 of 2 A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 14 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Printer Option 3 Amn tty on cx 11534 0015 pe 173342378 NOTES 1 members refer tc me here on BOM Piu PT2 2 Morter sere wie do ire den ce 8 PON 3 potantioneter for OO Vc amom Figure 19 5 1153
251. sse eJnso pua s21u04329 a Jadd G pEGTT pe cc NDI 1 XLIdD D UDUM 5130 ZNOJ winibe ssop qo Dunes AWS uwcus Old AUDI EOF GETS LAZ 10180 G YN endo PORE PPNI GRYSH TEZSE 0001511 18 wi wed banas MWS N342 f Gi Vendo moo il ili 31900 2910995 rae Dpe6coco muonbs pavad w Dujsoddo uo pus 147 quuesmy poog 20 LUTON IIDA 269261147 Suan jo vot pejuncu oq ed 1003 Scovel Le jo uonpiusuO SON wunso2u3 0i 9 uc E amp NI3A AO PJOH PUD 2g afus e quussoa4g Z Sp 420K 3958204 NOG 9 Jaja 1 8 3 emos 4705053556 48090583526 i iosu aap onc qon Sem 2 kausay 24 ejburs H 1 r pue jf o AOD puoog 0595414 Z 0 409 ues Jd 91551144 NAJIS 90050526 290005 giyvgHdS qos bunos ues sot JIMU ld 13 94 900 ldi jou aee gi j pr IL ponit EK ja 19 3 T 4 3 319 zi 90009205 4 NOTES 1 En
252. ster M edium Load 2 Wheel MM CA20 090 11534 D340 Fixed Caster M edium Load 2 Wheel MMCA21 100 11534 D340 Compression Clip Actuator Handle MMCL14 110 11534 D340 Machine Glide Light Screw 1172 120 11534 D340 Compression Spring Leveler Actuator 56 031 130 11534 D340 Ring Clip Shaft Retaining HDRR30 140 11534 D340 Roll Pin 3 16 diameter x 3 4 S S HDM 29 180 11534 0340 Cap Screw 10 32 1 4 Socket Head SCSH1004 185 11534 D340 Screw 10 32 x 5 8 Socket Head SCSH1010 220 11534 D340 Jam Nut 1 2 13 Hex SCM N20 230 11534 D340 Lock washer 10 Internal Tooth S S SCITOO10 L LIE ee 19 ms BY m t c gt E e o gt soe m a CESID emm r L g amp ou e m e 5 4 E amp gt d T i gt al RT eer Ser 4 Figure 18 1 11534 340 Swiveling casters assembly A larger version of this draw ing is located in Chapter 22 18 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 19 Options Hand Probe Option oPT1 Hand Probe T his option for the PCM 2 includes an H P 100C 100 cm hand held frisking detector with a detector holder mounted on the left side of the instrument Also included are a modified modular detector board M DB SP28B and an audible clicker board that clicks proportional to the net count rate of the
253. t N otwithstanding alarm annunciation includes presentation of quantitative information i e activity levels are stated Three counting modes are supported Preset All M aximum Sensitivity Fixed Count Time and M inimum Count T ime In each mode statistical control of the counting exercise ensures that the performance of the monitor is optimized for that mode s key parameters T he alarm se points all three modes RDA mode 2 and minimum count time mode 3 are all computed for each new background measurement T he parameters used include average background count rate count time sigma factor which controls false alarm probability confidence level RD A and detector efficiency PresetAll This mode maintains a fixed confidence leve probability of detection for the user selected RD A and count time False alarm probability is maintained at or below user prescribed maximum T his mode is best used when a fixed release limit is established and lower levels of activity are of negligible concern T his mode is also useful when a fixed count time and fixed alarm set points are preferred 1 8 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction Test M ode Maximum Sensitivity T his mode is appropriate for ALARA measurements U sing a fixed count time that is selected by the user the instrument applies the selected confidence level to achieve the lowest possibleRD A while maintaining a fixed false alarm probability
254. t computer polls out the accumulated transactions or if the buffer is forcibly cleared with the F2 key all transaction data will be lost T he operator may also clear any Contaminated D etector alarms that may exist by pressing the F3 key Contaminated D etector conditions are self clearing but may be cleared manually if desired T his screen presents an overview of the PCM 2 in the form of a detector map D etectors that are operating normally are shown in green while those that are unusable due to high background or sensitivity problems are colored blue If both the alpha and bea channels of a detector have been deactivated through the D etector Parameter Edit screen that detector will be depicted in gray T he keyboard arrow keys may be used to move a cursor around the map to select one detector at Background count rates alarm levels and status information are displayed for the highlighted detector 2 Technical M anual 6 1 Status Log File 6 2 Log File 2 Technical M anual The F3 key may be used while in this screen to clear the Contaminated D etector alarm flag should it be set Contaminated D etector conditions are self clearing but may be cleared manually if desired If status logging is enabled via Instrument Setup screen the PCM 2 maintains a status log that is stored in two ASCII files named NEWSTAT OLDSTAT T XT If an abnormal status condition occurs a time stam
255. t count rate from each detector channel is shown without any averaging or weighting factors applied T his screen is particularly useful for observing the response of detectors to a source 4 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 5 Edit PCM 2 VERSION V1 9 View Edit Status Calibration Utilities Detector Parameters Hand Probe Parameters Override Parameters System Parameters Instrument Setup Parameters RadNet Parameters Sum Zone Setup Banner M essages Preset All M ode Preset All Mode System Parameters In Preset All count mode the alpha and beta RD As confidence factor sigma factors and count time are specified when the PCM 2 is set up If background count rates are or become too high it is not possibleto detect sources of the specified activities the RD As in thetime allowed using the chosen confidence and sigma factors when this happens the instrument displays a high background failure message and ceases to perform measurements Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 1 Edit Preset All M ode 5 2 Alpha amp Beta RDAs Alpha amp Beta Sensitivities RDA Confidence Count Time 2 Technical M anual System Parameters Preset All M ode ALPHA RDA DPS 83 3 BETA RDA DPS 417 ALPHA SENSITIVITY 0 10 BETA SENSITIVITY 0 50 RDA CONFI DENCE 95 COUNT TI ME SEC 1 00 SI GMA FACTOR 4 00 BA
256. tector Board Parts List 2 390 11543 005 Header 9 Pin x 0 1 COM R809 3 340 11543 005 Header 4 Pin x 0 1 COM R1104 4 400 11543 005 Banana J ack Uninsulated COM 114 J P1 6 350 11543 005 Header 2x6 Pin x 0 1 COM R1312 XJ P1 360 11543 005 umper 2 Pin x 0 1 COHD121 MDB 20 11543 006 Ground Wire M DB to Detector 7211534541 30 11543 006 Washer Wave Washer 10 SCM 59 Figure 13 1 11543 001 odular detector board A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 13 5 Modular Detector Board M odular Detector Board Parts List T N Eberline 11543 D02F Figure 13 2 11543 005 M odular detector board components A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 13 6 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Modular Detector Board M odular Detector Board Parts List Figure 13 3 11543 008 M odular detector board hybrid schematic A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 13 7 Modular Detector Board M odular Detector Board Parts List BLANK PAGE 13 8 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 14 Clock Display Board General Descri ption Two of these boards are used in each PCM 2 In addition to the clock itself which shows count time remaining se
257. ter 22 17 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive Parts List Table 17 1 lists the electronic items incorporated in the hard drive and contains parts necessary for normal repair Table 17 1 Hard Disk Drive Parts List Item Ref Drawing No PartName Description Part No 010 11534 D563 Disk Drive 2GB VEIN 49 020 11534 D563 Cable Assembly Drive 24 long VEM 1107 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 17 3 Hard Disk Drive BLANK PAGE 17 4 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Swiveling Casters Parts List Thermo Electron Corporation Chapter 18 Swiveling Casters The PCM 2 s swiveling casters consist of two sets two fixed and two swiveling casters mounted in the rear and front corners of the unit s base to provide the user with an easily movable instrument platform T wo independently actuated rubberized machine levelers are also mounted in the unit s base adjacent to the swiveling casters T hese spring loaded levelers are manually actuated through holes located in the sides of the base into a down position with an actuation lever to stabilize the instrument in a fixed location of operation Actuating the levelers up enables the user to wheel the unit away from a wall gas bottle enclosure or another adjacent instrument for access to its rear or side doors or for decontamination of the unit T he actuation lever st
258. the high level system password default value 9999 followed by Enter 2 Usingthefour arrow keys select the O verride P arameters screen located under Edit on the M ain menu Press Enter to open this Screen 3 Enter a typical high voltage setting for gas proportional detectors operating at your altitude followed by Enter 4 Press Escapeto leavethis screen and storethe new voltage setting 5 Usethearrow keysto select the Background Averages screen under the M ain menu s D ata heading Background count rates for all detectors will be displayed within 1 2 minutes and are updated regularly O nce these values have stabilized the unit is ready for calibration and you may reduce gas flows as described above Before proceeding usethe arrow keys Enter and Escapeto navigate through the various menus and submenus of the PCM 2 program Examine each screen and learn where various functions are located R efer to appropriate sections in this technical manual for explanations of anything that isunclear T wo high voltage plateau programs are provided W e recommend running both before the instrument is put into service Both are selected from the Calibration menu Due to the large number of detectors on the PCM 2 it is practical to run a full voltage plateau on each T he Background Plateau routine uses natural background radiation as a calibration source and can run all detectors at the sametime T his test should be run over
259. the Edit menu Default sensitivity factors are 0 50 for the beta channels and 0 10 for the alpha channels W hile these values will work for many installations an environment that involves wide fluctuations of background accompanied by directional characteristics may warrant lowering the sensitivity factors Sensitivity factors are established in the System Parameters screen under the Edit menu If count ratesare high or low enough to indicateatrue sensitivity failure the following steps are suggested Alow sensitivity failure may also be caused by counting gas starvation Verify positive gas supply correct pressure and flow rate settings and search out any leaks or kinked hoses that may be present O nce corrected allow sufficient purge time before placing the channel back into service Other possible problems will be narrowed down to a failed detector assembly or its complimentary modular detector board M D B By exchanging the M D B with that of a known good channel it is possible to isolate the problem to either the board or the detector T he faulty assembly should be replaced Note Whenever a M DB is replaced the D etector D ownload routine must be invoked to restore the correct parameters to the affected detector A Verify that the high voltage failure message was not induced by some transient condition by first executing the D etector D ownload routine from the Utility menu If this does not restore the affected cha
260. the detector s geometry factor may be changed T his parameter is used only by the channel sensitivity test and will not change any test results Background rates are simply multiplied by the geometry factor before being used by the sensitivity test Sensitivity failures can be caused by greater fluctuations in ambient background than are allowed by the alpha beta sensitivity factors such cases of environmentally induced failures the symptoms are not due to poor detector performance G reater tolerancefor background fluctuationsis attained by reducing the sensitivity factors in the System Parameters screen under the Edit menu If several detectors exhibit low background counts the counting gas flow rate may be inadequate Increase the gas flow until acceptable backgrounds are obtained T here may be considerable lag time between increasing the flow rate and observing a resultant increasein count rate T he amount of lag time will depend on the degree of counting gas starvation and the final flow rate setting T wo options are provided to reduce the number of false alarms caused by radon gas which attachesto clothing Both may be enabled or disabled from the Instrument Parameters screen located under the Edit menu T hefirst approach isto enablethe radon compensation feature T his uses a proprietary computational algorithm which attemptsto recognizethe radon signature by comparing alpha and beta count rates from each detector T he se
261. therwise no parity and 1 stop bit RS 232C standard or RS 485 optional U ser selected baud rates of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19 200 are available T he default baud rate is 9600 Card reader port ASCII data format 1 start bit 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit RS 232C for Computer I dentics bar code reader TTL for Xico magnetic card reader Baud rate is fixed at 9600 PCM 2 interface port Binary protocol data format 1 start bit 8 data bits no parity and 2 stop bits RS 232C level Baud rate is fixed at 9600 2 Technical M anual 1 5 Introduction Specifications Gas manager communication port Binary type uLAN protocol data format 1 start bit 8 data bits and 1 stop bit RS 485 only Baud rate is fixed at 19 2K 19 200 baud Computer Minimum Specifications Pentium class processor 300 M z or faster with 64 M B RAM or more VGA graphics video card RJ 45 Ethernet connection 2 serial ports 1 parallel port System M emory SDRAM SODIMM x1 Max 256 MB System C hipset AM D CX 5530 W atchdog T imer Software Enable disable 1 6 sec optional 65 sec Expansion Interface PC 104 Battery Lithium 3V 196 mAH 1 0 MIO 1x EIDE Ultra D M A33 1 x floppy disk drive 1 x keyboard 1 x mouse 1 x RS 232 422 485 1 x RS 232 1 x LPT Ethernet Chipset RealT ek 8139 Interface IEEE 802 3u 100Base T Fast Ethernet compatible Built in boot ROM in Flash BIOS D isplay Chipset A
262. ting gasthrough pinholes in M ylar amp detector faces and through imperfect seals elsewhere e Contamination with air oxygen water vapor etc via the same routes Organic vapors released from plastics gaskets foam seals adhesives and other construction materials particularly in newly built or rebuilt detectors e Gradual degradation of the counting gas itself especially when exposed to high radiation fields he ideal solution isto provide each detector with a continuous flow of fresh counting gas to sweep out air and other contaminants as fast as they appear In large multiple detector instruments this may not be economically or logistically feasible Compromises may be made such as plumbing several detector chambers in series however the performance of each detector in such a chain becomes lower as gas purity decreases A corollary of this is that instruments should ideally be plumbed in a parallel manner so that no detector receives the used gas from another Unfortunately if each detector is operated at a normal flow rate of 200 cc min gas consumption in a large system is relatively high In addition each detector must be provided with its own flow meter and adjustment valveto insure that counting gas is evenly distributed among all of the detectors PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 57 Options Optional Features 19 58 PCM 2 Technical M anual Finally if the outlet of a detector isleft open chamber pressure
263. tion is centered about its mean T hus thefirst step in applying the G aussian distribution function to a sampleisto subtract the sample s mean from each data point so as to center the data about zero Second the distribution of a sample is scaled to the independent variable x by its standard deviation T he cumulative G aussian distribution function Figure A 4 is normalized i e the sum of all probabilities is 1 geometrically interpreted asthe total area under the normal curve T he probability that x or less will be encountered within a sample is defined asthe cumulative distribution from 4 to x as shown by Equation 31 22 31 AY x 1 ml 2 Technical M anual A 9 Statistical Control of Radiological Measurements Distribution Functions Asillustrated by Figure A 4 Equation 31 isthe area under the G aussian distribution curve from 4 to x Figure A 4 Cumulative Gaussian distribution function M uch data related to statistical distribution functions is readily available in tabular form in math handbooks T able A 2 presents values for the cumulative normal distribution operating on values of x from 0 00 through 5 00 10 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 90 1 00 1 10 1 20 1 30 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 70 1 80 1 90 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 2 50 2 60 2 70 2 80 2 90 3 00 3 10 3 20 3
264. tion parameters T hese instructions are intended to assist the first time user in setting up PCM 2 systems nce this initial setup has been completed adjustments may be made to comply with site specific requirements and policies Some familiarity with instruments using gas proportional radiation detectors is assumed in these instructions See the technical sections of this manual for detailed information regarding the unit and its operation PCM 2 Technical M anual 2 5 Installation Quick Start Instructions 2 6 Power Connections Counting Gas Supply PCM 2 Technical M anual ThePCM 2 may be operated from either 90 132 V or 180 264 V 50 60 H z A slide switch located on the computer power supply insidethe electronics enclosure makes voltage range selection Power is brought in via aline cord attached to the outlet strip located insidethe unit 1 Remove either of thetwo cover plates located on thetop of theunit and at the lower rear corner and route this cord out to a convenient power receptacle 2 Ensurethat the switch on the power strip is turned on 3 Turn on theunit by actuating the power switch on the side of the electronics enclosure N ormal operation is indicated by fan noise from the computer power supply Within afew seconds the disk drive will also begin to operate lights on the detector boards will flash and text will appear on the LCD panel T wo gas inlet hoses exit from the lower right corner o
265. to accurately monitor alpha contamination using the requirements se by the operational parameters until it has collected a representative background A If a hand frisking probe is installed it may be used during background update A display of hand probe readings on the background update screen results when the hand probe is removed from its cradle on the side of the instrument T his display disappears when the hand 15 again replaced into its cradle W hen sufficient beta background data is accumulated the unit s traffic lights located in the ceiling change from red to green indicating that the unit is ready for measurement Background counts are halted as soon asa user steps onto the measuring platform At this time the PCM 2 s user interface becomes active and a measurement cycle begins If an optional badge reader is in use the user may initiate a measurement by scanning the ID badge either before or after stepping onto the measuring platform If theinstrument has been set up to accept user ID or radiation work permit RW P numbers a message is displayed on the LCD panel instructing the occupant to provide this information T hese numbers must be no greater than nine characters K eypad entry characters must be numeric whereas badge reader characters may be alphanumeric D epending upon the setup options selected entries may be made from the keypad badge reader if installed or both T he user is instructed to enter t
266. tora nrw retained terter ond bonam strep LEE ty beo Clinch cml ond tog 5 sial Fool Detector Adjustment Brockets detecier pan in the cente ed nq ihe oelecior NOTE kroki chad 6 oremintion of oll 4 detBClors with reapect to their respecthe Wodulot Detector Gord ite 430 plocerrents shown 7 Detecine Nama 338 ano 328 onto thes respective Modukir pon bts for pheant kh the 2 trates Exctosura Covers 10 sub Uwe wina Cow hasty Lha hah d n Detector Goods morhed on eech ce Captive herdeors provkied wlth ihe Mela Wedment and i 9 Insia Moe Borb Fitting Rom 572 ito ine grhouat Raguicter Mam 554 um trei 5 1 back ile homssses 8 Install Dectronce Enclosure Covers errs 120 118 gnd 008 from top base usin Clamps detectors og per ra noses Inroug tha mci to detector 12 Apply Dust Shied 431 around every bamono plug on oi detectors oed te q 115354 0 0 1t Gus Supply Plum 2 1 fi D hs 5 T gt E ias kond Cover Assembly 11504317 see note Rear Dogr Assembly per 11524520 Regr Right Side Door Assembly
267. tron Corporation 6c W 210429 Z W2d SdISHOYa NO 070 ADH Mj M v pieq wy g anos m gw prayed d wamd Arapi ga 92e d wuedu Ej Apwe mj QD mq bj wnou os GT SPOKE Apo CMNOON Up 2 E OOSCSLLdA FOE amp iaquimua Sul 6 J3 SIH T D D a 0466260 0 0 aS SS ine m 5 80 0 kl ex EA 00 SS P 8 m 4 3 a a 3 402104105 uo1pe 3 oway L 5149104102 3u044 600 97STT 6 22 aunbly AUC 330705 apn eg 58458 d 7 a inc 915 cya L Qc gm gv EP 57 a M o t a 6 Sty 1 Q eee EET mem i coo 4 coor d 01 W 2521 4291 Z Wd 401210105 uoJ9 3 Owy ae LAU Ggp Su 03 ZEZ SH 200 15711 9 22 eni BE aD 180G 150 Hays OL SOYA Salva Qnva ORJINCOA 3HL vOdi 3oNvISIS3H MOT Y 30NYWMO4N3d 1538 30 MOu23 04d ONINIHATI 245 ONNDYD IADSA 5 305 HAY 3H QNM Ch 40 ONY g SM 31412345 JSAAGHLO SST NN N St
268. ts necessary for normal repair Table 19 1 Hand Probe Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No Part Name Description Part No 030 11534 D307 Hand Probe Holder HP 100B C ZP11530122 040 11534 D307 Adapter Assembly HV to P10 11417019 050 11534 0307 Cable Assembly Clicker Board YP11534522 060 11534 D307 PCBA Clicker Board YP11532000 or YP11585000 070 11534 D307 Cable Assembly Hand Probe Switch YP11534528 080 11534 D307 M odular Detector Board Chassis M ounted 59288 Assembly 090 11534 D307 Hand probe 100 cm2 HP100C 100 11534 D307 Cable Assembly 72 M HV M HV CA 85 72 180 11534 D307 1 8 ID Tubing Black PVC MM TU68 190 11534 D307 Flow meter 10 100 cc min M TFM 80 200 11534 D307 Hose T 1 8 Hose Barbs FGPL7 210 11534 D307 Hose Barb 1 8 x 1 8 M PT Brass FGBR53 220 11534 D307 Needle Valve Flow Adjustment 151 See Clicker Board Configuration on page 19 3 for the clicker PCBA applicable to your PCM 2 unit 19 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Hand Probe Clicker Board Hand Probe Clicker Board General Description ThePCM 2 clicker board is used in conjunction with monitors that have the hand probe option installed T he purpose of this board isto output audible clicking tones that are proportional to the combined net count rate background subtracted of the alpha and beta hand probe channels Clicking tones which emanate from the perforated section of the ceiling are produced only when the hand prob
269. ts the unit As soon as the gate closes it locks and the unit resumes counting background At the end of a contaminated measurement cycle the alarms are displayed After the user presses Alarm Ack the unit resumes normal operation T he access gate never unlocks T est the emergency exit Pressing the strip on the gate should unlock the gate causing the alarm to sound Appendix c Sigma Factor and RDA Calculators Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual C 1 Sigma Factor and RDA Calculators BLANK PAGE C 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Appendix D PCM 2 Revised Detector Assembly Procedure P N 11000A 308 T he insert which follows was the most recent version available at the time this manual was compiled It isincluded in this manual as an example Please check with your T hermo Electron customer service representative to see if a more recent version is available Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual D 1 2 Revised Detector Assembly Procedure P N 110004308 BLANK PAGE D 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Appendix 2 Detector High Voltage and Leak Test Procedure P N 10429A 525 T he insert which follows was the most recent version available at the time this manual was compiled It isincluded in this manual as an example Please check with your T hermo Electron customer service representative to see if a more recent version is available
270. uding configuration revisions are contained in chapters 11 through 15 Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 10 1 Hardware Complement Sheet BLANK PAGE 10 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation General Description Circuit Description Thermo Electron Corporation Processor Chapter 11 Front Panel Board D esigned to be a general purpose control panel this board provides many commonly used functions required for control of typical instruments A variety of input output and communications ports are included along with memory and computing capabilities T he PCM 2 front pane board isa Slave to the instrument s main computer It performs the following functions e Input of all switches such as the body position sensors gas pressure switches and front panel keypad e Control of the countdown clocks body position indicators and LED traffic lights e Control of the optional badge reader o Serial communications to and from an optional host computer e Nonvolatile storage of instrument setup parameters e Nonvolatile storage of measurement results if enabled for transfer to the host computer W hile it is beyond the scope of this document to provide step by step troubleshooting procedures for this board the following information should be of usein diagnosing and localizing failures A basic familiarity with microprocessor circuits is assumed An 80C 51 supported by 64 kB of program stor
271. uit boards and detectors can be repaired and returned to stock for future use Spare parts to support PCM 2 options are listed in Chapter 19 Options Table 21 1 Recommended Spare Parts List Part No Description Quantity SP28A M odular Detector Board 2 YP11534560 Detector Assembly Long 2 YP11534561 Detector Assembly M edium 2 YP11534562 Detector Assembly Short 1 YP11451000 RS485 to RS232 Converter Board 1 SP24B Front Panel Board 1 YP11582000 Gas Manager Board 1 M EVE152 Single Port Solenoid Valve 1 M EVE160 Three Port Solenoid Valve 1 VEIN 82 300M Single Board Computer 1 YP11534501 12 Vdc Power Supply 1 PSL09 0100 Computer Power Supply 1 SWMI105 Photocell Emitter Receiver Pair 1 VEIN 92 Flat Panel Display 1 Detector ylar amp 83 sq ft roll 1 Special Tools ZP11534699 PCM 2 Detector Clip Installation Tool 1 1 0 23 Gas Leak Detector 1 One PM C 2 one year PCM 2 Technical M anual 21 1 Recommended Spare Parts BLANK PAGE 21 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Drawings Overview Chapter22 Draw ings Overview This chapter contains a compilation of drawings contained in this manual For parts subject to replacement or failure see Chapter 20 Standard Parts List Numbers encircled in a drawing refer to Bill of M aterials BO M line
272. ulator ICAV7808 17 11582 004 LLC 5 V Regulator ICAVA2950C C1 11 18 19 11582 D04 Capacitor 10 yF 16V CPTA 100M 4X C2 7 10 11582 D04 Capacitor 0 1 uF 50V CPCE104P3N 12 15 17 20 21 C8 9 11582 D04 Capacitor 33 pF Ceramic CPCE330P3P C16 11582 D04 Capacitor 10 yF 35V CPTA 100M 4X CR1 11582 D04 LED Superbright Red OPLP57 Display 11582 D04 LCD Alpha 2 x 16 Char OPDS19 1 11582 D04 Header 12 Pin x 0 156 COM R612 3 11582 D04 Header 12 Pin x 0 100 COM R112 4 11582 004 Power J ack Circular COM 116 R1 3 11582 D04 Resistor 10K Ohm 1 4W RECC103B22 R2 4 14 11582 D04 Resistor 3 3K Ohm 1 4W RECC332B22 R5 11582 D04 Resistor 100 Ohm 1 4W RECC101B22 R6 11582 D04 Resistor 330 Ohm 1 4W RECC331B22 R7 11582 D04 Potentiometer 10K Ohm trim PTCE103B33 PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 61 Options Optional Features X1 11582 004 Crystal 7 3728 M Hz CY0S12 1 11582 004 Socket 40 Pin DIP SOIC140 XA2 11 12 11582 D04 Socket 20 Pin DIP SOIC120 XA3 4 11582 D04 l C Socket 28 Pin DIP 501C128 XA5 13 11582 D04 Socket 16 Pin DIP SOIC116 15 11582 004 Socket 14 Pin DIP SOIC114 XA6 8 10 11582 D04 Socket 08 Pin DIP S0IC308 None 11582 D04 umper Flat Cable W RFC162603 None 11582 D04 Circuit Board Gas M anager ZP11582002 lt H Figure 19 29 11582 001 Gas manager board A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 62 PCM 2 Technic
273. ulder Foot switch SCM W 40 Washer Actuator 620 11534 D314 Actuator Spacer 8 x 3 16 Brass SPRB8403 622 11534 D314 Spring Retaining 4 x 3 16 Brass SPRB4403 Spacer 626 11534 0314 Compression Actuator Return 56 048 Spring 679 11534 0314 Hex am Nut Glide Adjustment SCM N11 00 1134D31 Mounting Bracket Traffic Light 221534105 022 11534 0315 Mounting Bracket Speaker ZP11534137 110 11534 D315 Cover Plate Power Inlet ZP11534281 134 11534 D315 Traffic Light Cover Smoked Plastic ZP11534103 244 11534 D315 Probe Chamber Small 9 x7 Assembly 11534562 310 11534 D315 Cable Assembly Traffic Light YP11534506 324 11534 D315 Cable Assembly PC AT Speaker YP11534520 406 11534 D315 Traffic Light YP11534152 430 11534 D315 Modular Detector Probe Mounted SP28A Board Assembly 508 11534 D315 Nylon Flanged Door Pivot MM BU60 Bearing 534 11534 D315 Velcro Cinching Probe Retaining HDHA25 Strap 543 11534 D315 Clamp Adhesive Backed MM CL54 560 11534 D315 Strap Loop 2 wide HDHA27 587 11534 D315 Cable Tie Ty wrap 193 602 11534 D315 Hole Plug Base Trim MM BZ26 072 11534 D316 Support Instep Detector 2911534220 110 11534 03160 Cover Plate Instep Detector 7211534281 Panel 152 11534 D316 Plate Power Inlet ZP11534342 154 11534 D316 Backing Plate Power Inlet ZP11534343 332 11534 D316 Power Cord AC WRAC4 418 11534 D316 LCD Assembly 10 4 Color YP11534737 Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Cor
274. ument s disk and remain in effect until replaced Before attempting any measurements place the PCM 2 in operating mode and allow it to accumulate background count data for several minutes N ext select the Source C heck function from the Calibration menu Allow the instrument to make several measurements with no source present and verify that few preferably zero false alarms occur se source to determinethat each detector responds adequately If the results obtained are acceptable the unit is ready for service When the PCM 2 isset up it may be desirable to fine tune detector and instrument parameters for optimum performance T he important fact to remember when performing such adjustments is that changes that help 2 Technical M anual 2 9 Installation Quick Start Instructions 2 10 Problem Detectors Detector Parameters PCM 2 Technical M anual reduce count times and eliminate false alarms may also reducethe unit s sensitivity to genuine contamination All changes should be carefully evaluated to insure that overall performance remains acceptable Regardless of how the unit is set up there will always be one detector that dueto high background or low efficiency requires longer count times or provides lower sensitivity than the others A typical example 15 the detector located under the foot platform it is mounted horizontally making it more sensitive to cosmic radiation its efficiency is reduced by the h
275. unit s detector grid with the alarmed detectors indicated in red 2 Technical M anual 1 1 Introduction General Description Specificatiarc 1 diveraieta ero 1 3 04 em 2 Appias weigh of steword un 650 bs DOO a 90 122 w 150 284 Von 60 50 E 9 large apex 4 Mecum open 3 Smal LEE 333 113 24 Right Side 1 46 in 10 Rex Sm it Fight Sise View Reor Side View Frost View Figure 1 1 11534 555 PCM 2 outline A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 1 2 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction General Description T wo additional count down clock graphic displays provide information and instructions to help the user assume a correct body position relative to the detector grid for proper measurement Red LED s indicate to the user any proximity switches that need to be actuated in order to achieve proper body positioning D uring the measurement the remaining count time in seconds is indicated on the active display A standard audible annunciator and an optional voice annunciator provide user prompts to supplement the visual counting clocks position indicators and graphic screen Input of a user identification user ID number and Radiation W ork Permit RW P number if either or both are selected can be performed from the 20 button touch keypad or an
276. up to four remote annunciator modules in one location T able 19 6 liststhe items incorporated in the remote annunciator board and wall mount and should contain all parts necessary for normal repair Parts List Table 19 7 Remote Annunciator and W all M ount Remote Annunciator Parts List Item Ref No Drawing No Part Name Description Part No 100 11534 D529 PCBA Remote Annunciator YP11549000 110 11534 D529 Wall Mounting Bracket Remote Annunciator ZP11534158 120 11534 D531 Wall Bracket Cover Remote Annunciator ZP11534195 140 11534 0529 Annunciator Panel Remote Annunciator ZP11534157 160 11534 D529 Rubber Foot Press On MM RU72 N A 11534 D531 Cable Interconnect CA 89 XXFT PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 21 Options Wall Mount Remote Annunciator 4 plc s 4 plc s PCM2 Access Control 2 Exit Gote Alorm Annunciator Alarm Annunciator 1 160 NOTES 1 Fncircled numbers refer to line numbers BOM YP11530144 and BOM PCMZ 58 2 pic s 70 2 Adjust P C Board position to allow black pushbutton switch to travel freely when ossembled Figure 19 9 11534 529 Remote annunciator assembly A larger version of this drawing is located in Chapter 22 19 22 PCM 2 Technical M anual Thermo Electron Corporation Options Wall Mount Remote Annunciator 325 Hole Mounting Pattern scale 1 1 Wol Miot ibeni Accepts up 10 4 Renate Annuaciators Wot Mount gttochment herdwore
277. variance mean value for each detector is between 0 66 and 1 50 If any detectors are outside this range repeat this test twice more 2 x 100 count cycles Any detector which is out of range all three times is unacceptable and must be repaired or replaced Retain the variance test results as part of the checkout record for the instrument Storing the Calibration on a Floppy Disk 1 Exit the PCM 2 program 2 Insert the formatted floppy into Drive A 3 At the c pem2 prompt copy the all of the dat files to the formatted floppy 4 Check and verify the following files have been copied to the diskette PCM2CAL DAT PCM2DET DAT PCM2MESG DAT PCM2SYS DAT PCM2UTL DAT PCM2ZONE DAT Thermo Electron Corporation Efficiencies and Shield Factors Efficiency Test Shield Factors Thermo Electron Corporation Procedures Efficiencies and Shield Factors Calibrate all detectors for alpha and beta efficiencies and shield factors per the following procedures All alpha channels should have an efficiency of at least 1296 4 pi and all beta channels should have an efficiency of 1696 4 pi with the exception of the detectors in T able B 1 As each detector is calibrated store the efficiency values Table B 1 Alpha and Beta Efficiency and Shield Factor Calibration Procedures for Detectors Alpha with the Beta with the Aipha Rugged Foot Plate peta Rugged Foot Plate 29 12 4pi 8 14 4 pi 10 30 12 4pi 14 4 pi D ete
278. veral red LED s prompt users to correct their body position if any of the sensor switches are not being actuated T hetwo circuit boards are identical however a different graphic overlay is used in each location T he heart of this board is the two digit numeric display chip which is capable of accepting serial data from the front panel board and using that information to light the appropriate LED digit segments Additional bits from the display s internal shift register are brought out to a driver chip which in turn controlsthe red LED s behind the body position displays Clock Display Board Proper operation of the traffic light displays requires setting 51 8 according Configuration to 1 able 14 1 Table 14 1 51 8 Switch Settings Position Open Closed 1 CDB 1 Rev 0 1 CDB 1 Rev A 2 CDB 2 Rev 0 1 CDB 2 Rev 3 8 Not used Not used Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Technical M anual 14 1 Clock Display Board 14 2 Clock Display Board Table 14 2 lists the items incorporated the clock display board and Parts List contains all parts necessary for normal repair Table 14 2 Clock Display Board Parts List Ref Desig Drawing No Part Name Part Description Part No None 11534 C151 Circuit Board Clock Display ZP11534149 P1 P2 11534 C151 Header 12 Pin x 0 1 COM R912 1 C2 11534 C151 Capacitor 0 1 F 50V CPCE104P3N CR1 3 11534 C151 Diode 1 Amp 50V CRSIIN 4002 R1 7 11534 51 Resistor 10
279. w changes in actual background count rates T he weight factors smooth statistical fluctuations in background measurements by synthesizing an exponential moving average Increasing the weighting factor will enhance the smoothing function at the expense of extending the time constant associated with recognizing step changes in the real average background count rate T heformula for computing the weighted average background count rate is _ X WE WF 1 R bkg where PCM 2 Technical M anual 5 13 Edit Hand Probe Parameters 5 14 Beta Shield Factor Hand Probe Parameters PCM 2 Technical M anual the new computed average background count rate Roig the previous computed average background count rate WF weight factor and the most recently measured real background count rate measured in a single count interval When the instrument is occupied some detectors may be shielded from local radiation sources that account for part of the observed background T he shield factor is defined as background while occupied divided by background while unoccupied Note Alpha channel shield factors are always equal to 1 A Thefollowing values are displayed but may not be edited Alpha amp Beta Background The current background count rates for this detector Alpha amp Beta Alarm Level N amp count rates above background at which this detector will alarm based on the current background RD
280. way au oj 25554 SudquinU l SION veo 980 iet ab 58532858 36258 1 x nde TUE NE Q lt 2 gt M 5834855 2885885 2 fii T n vli Bp AES was Pers c Em UE BE BEZE gy E 8 pom 222083222031 iz 22 72 PCM 2 Technical M anual Figure 22 65 11582 001 Gas manager board Thermo Electron Corporation enue W 16214291 Z DO mpo puo pog ub TIT XJ npc 1 4 Gu ul UA ax al v puo boy aL puo APNA prf usu time c UI ctr OQ CSO Wd wA MR OS pz e um T uo 2b co Yeu Ap fNGLO MISNI SSY ex AnH cll eur POrN 200 2861 1 402104105 29 4 oway L JUaUOdWOD Sed E00 Z8STT 99 22 N o e 00 2811 3NORM3g3 Wee amer ses 97 955 vz sword t ori
281. wer jack attached which may be either from the wall plug unit VEM 1349 or the voltage tap YP 11534707 from the main power supply Thermo Electron Corporation Thermo Electron Corporation PCM 2 Setup Options Optional Features T hefollowing bar codes from the Scan C orporation s 2000 series programming guide were used Enter Program Mode Exit Program Mode Reset Host Postamble Single Port Host Single Port Aux page 7 page 7 page 7 page 8 page 9 page 11 With the power on at the interface module red LED is lit at the scanner the following barcode scanning order was done 1 Bar Code 2 Enter Program M ode 3 Host 4 Single Port H ost Single Port Aux C 5 Postamble 6 Single Port ost Single Port Aux C 7 Exit program T M ain menu 2 Select theUtilities screen nterface response T hree beeps T wo beeps T hree beeps T wo beeps T hree beeps T wo beeps then three beeps Press Esc and then the password 9999 is default to access the PCM 2 Technical M anual 19 43 Options Optional Features 19 44 Final Setup Operation PCM 2 Technical M anual 3 Access the card reader test and verify that the number is being read when the card is swiped through the scanner If the test was successful then secure the PCM 2 If the test was not successful verify cable connections scanner setup etc Note Scan the Reset bar code to reset the scanner to
282. within a menu or screen is highlighted in color Other items are selected by using the arrow keys If theactive item isone with a limited number of possible values such as Count mode or activity units Enter F2 or thearrow keys are used to cycle through the list of options N umeric values may be are typed in followed Enter Pressing Escape returns the user to the next higher level menu From the M ain menu bar Escape returns the unit to operating mode U pon entering T est mode a horizontal menu bar is displayed containing five main headings View Access to background and measurement data Edit Submenus containing parameters and system configuration options Status System status information Calibration Routines needed to calibrate and verify PCM 2 operation Utilities Routines used to set up and check the PCM 2 s computer hardware 2 Technical M anual 3 3 Operation Computer Interface 34 PCM 2 Technical M anual T hese headings may be selected by using the left and right arrow keys or by typing the highlighted capital letter in the heading name Pressing Enter or thedown arrow key causesthe availablefunctions under the current heading to be displayed Items from submenus are selected by pressing Enter or by typing the highlighted capital letter T he Escape key is used at any timeto exit the present display screen Refer to chapters 4 through 8 for detailed operational information on each of the five major M

PDF compression, OCR, web-optimization with

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents